Before Use
- Initial Information
Basic Guide
- Basic Operations
  - Initial Preparations
  - Trying the Camera Out
Advanced Guide

Canon EOS M3 + EF-M 18-55mm IS STM Kit User Manual

Displayed below is the user manual for EOS M3 + EF-M 18-55mm IS STM Kit by Canon which is a product in the Digital Cameras category. This manual has pages.

Related Manuals

Canon EOS M50 + EF-M 15-45mm f/3.5-6.3 IS STM Kit Manual

Canon M50 + EF-M 15-45mm f/3.5-6.3 IS STM + EF-M 55-200mm f/4.5-6.3 IS STM Manual

ENGLISH

Before Use

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

●Make sure you read this guide, including the “Safety Precautions”

13) section, before using the camera.

●Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera properly.

●Store this guide so that you can conveniently access it in the future.

●Click the buttons in the lower right to access other pages.

: Next page

: Previous page

: Return to the page you were viewing when you clicked a link.

●To jump to the beginning of a chapter, click the chapter title at right.

Camera User Guide

Before Use

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Initial Information

Package Contents

Before use, make sure the following items are included in the package.

If anything is missing, contact your camera retailer.

Camera

(with body cap)

Battery Pack

LP-E17

(with terminal cover)

Battery Charger

LC-E17/LC-E17E

Neck Strap

EM-200DB

Interface Cable

IFC-400PCU

●Printed matter is also included.

●Check that the contents of the lens kit are included in the camera’s

package.

●A memory card is not included.

Before Use

Compatible Memory Cards

The following memory cards (sold separately) can be used, regardless of

capacity.

●SD memory cards*1

●SDHC memory cards *1*2

●SDXC memory cards*1*2

*1 Cards conforming to SD standards. However, not all memory cards have been

veried to work with the camera.

*2 UHS-I memory cards are also supported.

Preliminary Notes and Legal Information

●Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images

were recorded correctly. Please note that Canon Inc., its subsidiaries

and afliates, and its distributors are not liable for any consequential

damages arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory,

including memory cards, that result in the failure of an image to be

recorded or to be recorded in a way that is machine readable.

●Images recorded by the camera shall be for personal use. Refrain

from unauthorized recording that infringes on copyright law, and note

that even for personal use, photography may contravene copyright

or other legal rights at some performances or exhibitions, or in some

commercial settings.

●The camera warranty is valid only in the area of purchase. In case of

camera problems while abroad, return to the area of purchase before

contacting a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.

●Although the LCD monitor is produced under extremely high-precision

manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of the pixels meet

design specications, in rare cases some pixels may be defective

or may appear as red or black dots. This does not indicate camera

damage or affect recorded images.

●The LCD monitor may be covered with a thin plastic lm for protection

against scratches during shipment. If covered, remove the lm before

using the camera.

●When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become

warm. This is not a malfunction.

Before Use

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

(1) LCD monitor / Touch screen*

(2) Focal plane mark

(3) Hot shoe

(4) Flash sync contacts

(5) Indicator

(6) Speaker

(7) Movie button

(8) [ (Playback)] button

(9) Strap mount

(10) HDMITM terminal

(11) [ (AE lock)] / [ (Index)]

button

(12) [ (AF Frame adjustment)] /

[ (Magnify)] button

(13) [ (Menu)] button

(14) [ (Information)] button

(15) [ (ISO speed)] / [ (Wi-Fi)] /

Up button

(16) [ (Manual focus)] / Left button

(17) Control dial

(18) [ (Quick setting menu)] / Set

button

(19) [ (Flash)] / Right button

(20) [ (Erase)] / Down button

* Touch may not be detected as easily if you apply a screen protector.

●Turning the control dial is one way to

choose setting items, switch images, and

perform other operations. Most of these

operations are also possible with the

[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.

Part Names

(1) [ (Multifunction)] button

(2) Front dial

(3) Remote control sensor

(4) EF-M lens mount index

(5) Grip

(6) Contacts

(7) Exposure compensation dial

(8) Shutter button

(9) Power button

(10) Mode dial

(11) Flash

(12) Microphone

(13) Strap mount

(14) [ (Flash pop-up)] switch

(15) Lamp

(16) Lens lock pin

(17) Terminal cover

(18) Wi-Fi antenna area

(19) Lens release button

(20) Lens mount

(21) External microphone IN terminal

(22) Digital terminal

(23) (N-Mark)*

(24) Tripod socket

(25) DC coupler terminal cover

(26) Memory card slot / Battery pack

compartment cover

* Used with NFC features (=

118).

Before Use

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Conventions Used in this Guide

●In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera

buttons and dials on which they appear or which they resemble.

●The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons.

●Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in

brackets.

●: Important information you should know

●: Notes and tips for expert camera use

●: Indicates touch-screen operations

●=

xx: Pages with related information (in this example, “xx” represents

a page number)

●Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings.

●All lenses and mount adapters are referred to simply as “lenses” and

“mount adapters”, regardless of whether they are included in the lens

kit or sold separately.

●Illustrations in this manual show the camera with lens EF-M 18-55mm

f/3.5-5.6 IS STM attached.

●For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as

the “memory card”.

●The symbols “ Still Images” and “ Movies” below titles indicate

how the function is used — whether for still images or movies.

Lens

EF-M Lens

(Lens with no focus mode switch or image stabilizer switch)

(1) Focusing ring

(2) Hood mount

(3) Filter-mounting thread (front of lens)

(4) Lens mount index

(5) Zoom ring

(6) Zoom position index

(7) Contacts

Before Use

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Table of Contents

Before Use

Initial Information .............................................................. 2

Package Contents .................................................................... 2

Compatible Memory Cards....................................................... 2

Preliminary Notes and Legal Information ................................. 2

Part Names .............................................................................. 3

Lens .........................................................................................4

Conventions Used in this Guide ............................................... 4

Common Camera Operations ................................................ 12

Safety Precautions ................................................................. 13

Basic Guide

Basic Operations............................................................. 16

Initial Preparations.................................................................. 16

Attaching the Strap .................................................................... 16

Charging the Battery Pack .........................................................16

Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card ............................17

Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card .....................18

Setting the Date and Time ......................................................... 18

Changing the Date and Time .................................................19

Display Language ...................................................................... 20

Attaching a Lens ........................................................................ 20

Detaching a Lens ..................................................................21

Lens Instruction Manual ........................................................21

Attaching EF and EF-S Lenses .................................................21

Detaching a Lens ..................................................................22

Using a Tripod .......................................................................22

Stabilizing the Image .............................................................22

Trying the Camera Out ........................................................... 23

Holding the Camera ...................................................................23

Shooting in Scene Intelligent Auto Mode ...................................23

Viewing ......................................................................................25

Erasing Images .....................................................................26

Advanced Guide

1 Camera Basics ........................................................... 27

On/Off ..................................................................................... 27

Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down) ............................. 28

Power Saving in Shooting Mode ...........................................28

Power Saving in Playback Mode ........................................... 28

Shutter Button ........................................................................ 28

Shooting Modes ..................................................................... 29

Adjusting the Angle of the LCD Monitor ................................. 29

Tilting the Screen Downward ................................................. 29

Tilting the Screen Upward .....................................................29

Shooting Display Options ....................................................... 30

Using the Quick Setting Menu ................................................ 31

Using Touch-Screen Operations to Congure Settings .............31

Using the Menu Screen .......................................................... 32

Touch-Screen Operations .......................................................... 33

On-Screen Keyboard.............................................................. 33

Indicator Display ..................................................................... 34

2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ................................ 35

Shooting with Camera-Determined Settings .......................... 35

Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) ..............................................35

Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode ................................................... 37

Digest Movie Playback ..........................................................37

Still Images/Movies ...............................................................37

Before Use

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Adding Artistic Effects ............................................................ 53

Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect (Fish-Eye Effect) ............ 54

Shooting Oil Painting-like Photos (Art bold Effect) ....................54

Shooting Watercolor-like Photos (Water Painting Effect) ..........54

Shots Resembling Miniature Models (Miniature Effect) .............55

Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time

(for One-Minute Clips) ...........................................................55

Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect (Toy Camera Effect) ...........56

Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect ..............................................56

Shooting in Monochrome (Grainy B/W) ..................................... 57

Shooting Movies in Movie Mode ............................................ 57

Shooting Still Images during Movie Recording ..........................58

Locking or Changing Image Brightness .....................................58

Sound Settings ..........................................................................59

Adjusting the Recording Volume ...........................................59

Turning Off the Wind Filter ....................................................59

Using the Attenuator .............................................................. 59

4 P Mode ........................................................................ 60

Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode) ....................................... 60

Adjusting Shooting Functions from a Single Screen .............. 61

Image Brightness (Exposure) ................................................. 61

Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation) ............ 61

Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock) ......................61

Changing the Metering Method .................................................62

Changing the ISO Speed ...........................................................62

Adjusting ISO Auto Settings ..................................................63

Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting) ...............................63

Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast

(Auto Lighting Optimizer) ........................................................... 64

Shooting Bright Subjects (Highlight Tone Priority) ..................... 64

Image Colors .......................................................................... 65

Still Images ............................................................................ 38

Movies ...................................................................................38

Scene Icons ............................................................................... 39

On-Screen Frames ....................................................................40

Common, Convenient Features ............................................. 40

Using the Self-Timer .................................................................. 40

Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake .......................41

Shooting by Touching the Screen (Touch Shutter) ....................41

Continuous Shooting .................................................................42

Image Customization Features .............................................. 43

Changing Image Quality ............................................................ 43

Saving RAW Images .............................................................43

Using the Menu .....................................................................44

Changing the Aspect Ratio ........................................................ 45

Changing Movie Image Quality .................................................45

Using the Dual Axis Electronic Level ...................................... 46

Customizing Camera Operation ............................................. 47

Preventing the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp from Lighting Up ......47

Changing the Image Display Period after Shots ........................47

3 Other Shooting Modes .............................................. 48

Shooting with Your Favorite Settings (Creative Assist) .......... 48

Saving/Loading Settings ............................................................ 49

Saving Settings .....................................................................49

Loading ..................................................................................50

Using Screen Settings ........................................................... 50

Playing Back Images ................................................................. 50

[] Mode and Creative Zone Settings .................................50

Specic Scenes ...................................................................... 51

Taking Vivid Pictures of Food (Food) .........................................52

Image Effects (Creative Filters) .............................................. 52

Shooting High-Contrast Scenes (High Dynamic Range) ...........53

Before Use

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Lens Peripheral Illumination/

Chromatic Aberration Correction ...............................................79

Changing the Noise Reduction Level ........................................80

Using Multi Shot Noise Reduction ......................................... 80

Reducing Noise at Slow Shutter Speeds ...................................81

5 Tv, Av, M, and C Modes ............................................. 82

Specic Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)...................................... 82

Specic Aperture Values ([Av] Mode) ..................................... 83

Depth-of-Field Preview ..............................................................83

Specic Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values ([M] Mode) ..... 84

Long (Bulb) Exposures ........................................................... 85

Adjusting the Flash Output ..................................................... 85

Specic Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values ........................ 86

Customizing Controls and Display ......................................... 87

Customizing Display Information ............................................... 87

Customizing Displayed Data .................................................87

Setting Up Advanced Camera Functions ...................................88

Adding Functions to Buttons and Dials .................................89

Saving Shooting Settings ([C] Mode) ........................................90

Settings that can be saved ....................................................90

Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items (My Menu) .......91

6 Playback Mode .......................................................... 93

Viewing ................................................................................... 93

Touch-Screen Operations .......................................................... 94

Switching Display Modes ...........................................................95

Dening Displayed Shooting Data .........................................95

Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights) ...................... 96

Brightness Histogram ............................................................96

RGB Histogram .....................................................................96

Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting Still Images

(Digest Movies) ..........................................................................96

Adjusting White Balance ............................................................65

Custom White Balance .......................................................... 65

Manually Correcting White Balance ......................................66

Using Your Favorite Shades (Picture Style) ..............................67

Adjusting Picture Styles .........................................................68

Saving Customized Picture Styles ........................................69

Shooting Range and Focusing ............................................... 69

Selecting the AF Method ...........................................................69

1-Point AF ..............................................................................69

+Tracking ............................................................................70

Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF) ..............................71

Shooting with the AF Lock ......................................................... 71

Shooting with Servo AF .............................................................72

Changing the Focus Setting ......................................................73

Fine-tuning Focus ...................................................................... 73

Shooting in Manual Focus Mode ............................................... 74

Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking) ....................74

Flash....................................................................................... 75

Changing the Flash Mode .........................................................75

Auto .......................................................................................75

On ..........................................................................................75

Slow Synchro ........................................................................75

Off .......................................................................................... 75

Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation ............................76

Shooting with the FE Lock ......................................................... 76

Changing the Flash Timing ........................................................77

Changing the Flash Metering Mode ..........................................77

Resetting Flash Settings ............................................................77

Other Settings ........................................................................ 78

Changing the IS Mode Settings ................................................. 78

Shooting Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown

before Shooting .....................................................................78

Before Use

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Applying Filter Effects .............................................................. 111

Correcting Red-Eye ................................................................. 112

Editing Movies .......................................................................113

Reducing File Sizes ................................................................. 114

Editing Digest Movies .............................................................. 114

7 Wi-Fi Functions........................................................ 115

Available Wi-Fi Features .......................................................115

Importing Images into a Smartphone ....................................116

Sending Images to an NFC-Compatible Smartphone ............. 116

Connecting via NFC When Camera Is Off

or in Shooting Mode ............................................................ 116

Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in Playback Mode ... 117

Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu .......................... 118

Using Another Access Point .................................................... 119

Conrming Access Point Compatibility ................................ 120

Using WPS-Compatible Access Points ...............................120

Connecting to Listed Access Points ....................................121

Previous Access Points .......................................................122

Sending Images to a Registered Web Service ..................... 122

Registering Web Services .......................................................122

Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY ..............................123

Registering Other Web Services .........................................124

Uploading Images to Web Services ........................................125

Viewing Images Using a Media Player ................................. 126

Printing Images Wirelessly from a Connected Printer .......... 127

Sending Images to Another Camera .................................... 129

Image Sending Options ........................................................ 130

Sending Multiple Images .........................................................130

Notes on Sending Images .......................................................130

Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels (Image Size) ........131

Adding Comments ................................................................... 131

Viewing by Date .....................................................................97

Browsing and Filtering Images ............................................... 97

Navigating through Images in an Index ..................................... 97

Touch-Screen Operations ......................................................98

Finding Images Matching Specied Conditions .........................98

Using the Front Dial to Jump between Images ..........................99

Touch-Screen Operations ....................................................100

Image Viewing Options ........................................................ 100

Magnifying Images ..................................................................100

Touch-Screen Operations ....................................................101

Viewing Slideshows ................................................................. 101

Protecting Images ................................................................ 102

Using the Menu .......................................................................102

Choosing Images Individually ..............................................103

Selecting a Range ...............................................................103

Protecting All Images at Once .............................................104

Clearing All Protection at Once ...........................................104

Erasing Images .................................................................... 105

Erasing Multiple Images at Once .............................................105

Choosing a Selection Method .............................................105

Choosing Images Individually ..............................................105

Selecting a Range ...............................................................106

Specifying All Images at Once .............................................106

Rotating Images ................................................................... 107

Using the Menu .......................................................................107

Deactivating Auto Rotation ......................................................108

Applying Ratings .................................................................. 108

Using the Menu .......................................................................108

Editing Still Images ............................................................... 109

Resizing Images ......................................................................109

Using the Menu ................................................................... 110

Cropping .................................................................................. 110

Before Use

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Activating the Cleaner .........................................................143

Cleaning Manually ............................................................... 143

Checking Certication Logos ................................................... 144

Setting Copyright Information to Record in Images .................144

Deleting All Copyright Information .......................................144

Adjusting Other Settings .......................................................... 145

Restoring Defaults ................................................................... 145

9 Accessories ............................................................. 146

System Map ......................................................................... 147

Optional Accessories ............................................................ 148

Lens ......................................................................................... 148

Power Supplies ........................................................................148

Flash ........................................................................................ 149

Other Accessories ...................................................................149

Printers ....................................................................................150

Using Optional Accessories.................................................. 150

Playback on a TV ....................................................................150

Powering the Camera with Household Power ......................... 151

Remote Control Shooting ........................................................152

Using the Hot Shoe .................................................................152

Using Electronic Viewnders (Sold Separately) ......................153

Using an External Flash (Sold Separately) ..............................154

Setting External Flash Functions .........................................155

Setting External Flash Custom Functions ...........................156

Resetting External Flash Functions .....................................157

Using External Microphones ....................................................157

Using the Software ............................................................... 158

Software ..................................................................................158

Software Instruction Manual ................................................ 158

Checking Your Computer Environment ...................................158

Installing the Software .............................................................158

Saving Images to a Computer ................................................. 159

Sending Images Automatically (Image Sync) ....................... 131

Initial Preparations ................................................................... 131

Preparing the Camera .........................................................131

Preparing the Computer ......................................................132

Sending Images .......................................................................132

Shooting Remotely ............................................................... 133

Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings.......................................... 134

Editing Connection Information ...............................................134

Changing a Device Nickname .............................................134

Erasing Connection Information ..........................................135

Specifying Images to Share with Smartphones ...................135

Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default ...................................136

8 Setting Menu ............................................................ 137

Adjusting Basic Camera Functions ...................................... 137

Date-Based Image Storage ..................................................... 137

File Numbering ........................................................................137

Formatting Memory Cards ....................................................... 138

Low-Level Formatting .......................................................... 138

Changing Video Formats ......................................................... 139

Electronic Level Calibration ..................................................... 139

Resetting the Electronic Level ............................................. 139

Using Eco Mode ......................................................................139

Power-Saving Adjustment .......................................................140

Screen Brightness ...................................................................140

World Clock .............................................................................141

Date and Time .........................................................................141

Display Language .................................................................... 141

Silencing Camera Operations ..................................................142

Hiding Hints and Tips ...............................................................142

Changing Touch Screen Settings ............................................142

Cleaning the Image Sensor ..................................................... 142

Turning Auto Cleaning Off ...................................................142

Before Use

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Info Display 6 .......................................................................176

Summary of Movie Control Panel ........................................176

Functions and Menu Tables ................................................. 177

Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode ...........................177

Quick Settings .........................................................................179

Shooting Tabs .......................................................................... 181

C.Fn Tab ..................................................................................186

INFO. Quick Control ................................................................187

Set Up Tab ............................................................................... 187

My Menu Tab ...........................................................................188

Playback Tab ...........................................................................188

Playback Mode Quick Settings ................................................ 188

Handling Precautions ........................................................... 189

Specications ....................................................................... 190

Type .....................................................................................190

Image Sensor ......................................................................190

Recording System ...............................................................190

Image Processing during Shooting .....................................191

Autofocus ............................................................................191

Exposure Control .................................................................191

Shutter ................................................................................. 192

Flash ....................................................................................192

Drive, Self-timer System ......................................................192

Still Photo Shooting .............................................................192

Movie Shooting Settings ......................................................192

LCD Monitor ........................................................................193

Playback .............................................................................. 193

Post-processing of Images .................................................. 193

Direct Printing ...................................................................... 194

Custom Functions ...............................................................194

Interface ..............................................................................194

Wi-Fi ....................................................................................194

Printing Images .................................................................... 160

Easy Print ................................................................................160

Conguring Print Settings ........................................................ 161

Cropping Images before Printing .........................................162

Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing ...............162

Available Layout Options ..................................................... 163

Printing ID Photos ...............................................................163

Printing Movie Scenes ............................................................. 163

Movie Printing Options ........................................................163

Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF) ..................................164

Conguring Print Settings ....................................................164

Setting Up Printing for Individual Images ............................165

Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images .......................... 165

Setting Up Printing for All Images ........................................165

Clearing All Images from the Print List ................................165

Adding Images to a Photobook ...............................................166

Choosing a Selection Method .............................................166

Adding Images Individually ..................................................166

Adding All Images to a Photobook ......................................166

Removing All Images from a Photobook .............................167

Appendix .................................................................. 168

Troubleshooting .................................................................... 168

On-screen Messages ........................................................... 172

On-screen Information.......................................................... 174

During Shooting ....................................................................... 174

Battery Level .......................................................................174

Playback ..................................................................................175

Info Display 1 .......................................................................175

Info Display 2 .......................................................................175

Info Display 3 .......................................................................175

Info Display 4 .......................................................................175

Info Display 5 .......................................................................176

Before Use

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Network Functions ...............................................................194

Power Supplies ...................................................................195

Dimensions and Weight .......................................................195

Operation Environment .......................................................195

Number of Shots per Memory Card ....................................195

Recording Time per Memory Card ......................................196

Internal Flash Range Guide ................................................196

Battery Pack LP-E17 ...........................................................196

Battery Charger LC-E17/LC-E17E ......................................197

Index..................................................................................... 198

Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions ........................................ 200

Radio Wave Interference Precautions ..................................... 200

Security Precautions ................................................................200

Trademarks and Licensing ..................................................201

Disclaimer ............................................................................201

Before Use

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Common Camera Operations

Shoot

●Use camera-determined settings (Auto Mode, Hybrid Auto Mode)

- =

35, =

●Use the effects of your choice (Creative Assist)

- =

●Blur the background; keep the background in sharp focus (Av Mode)

- =

●Freeze movement; blur movement (Tv Mode)

- =

●Add effects to photos (Creative Filters)

- =

●Shoot continuously (Continuous Shooting)

- =

●Shoot in locations where ash is prohibited (Flash Off)

- =

●Include yourself in the shot (Self-Timer)

- =

View

●View images (Playback Mode)

- =

●Automatic playback (Slideshow)

- =

101

●On a TV

- =

150

●On a computer

- =

158

●Browse through images quickly

- =

●Erase images

- =

105

Shoot/View Movies

●Shoot movies

- =

35, =

●View movies (Playback Mode)

- =

●Print pictures

- =

160

Save

●Save images to a computer via a cable

- =

159

Use Wi-Fi Functions

●Send images to a smartphone

- =

116

●Share images online

- =

122

●Send images to a computer

- =

131

Before Use

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

This could result in electrical shock or re.

If the product gets wet, or if liquid or foreign objects get inside, remove the

battery pack/batteries or unplug immediately.

●Do not look through the viewnder or interchangeable lens (depending

on which your product has) at intense light sources, such as the sun

on a clear day or an intense articial light source.

This could damage your eyesight.

●If your product uses an interchangeable lens, do not leave the lens or

camera with the lens attached out in the sun without the lens cap on.

This could result in re.

●Do not touch the product during thunderstorms if it is plugged in.

This could result in electrical shock or re. Immediately stop using the

product and distance yourself from it.

●Use only the recommended battery pack/batteries.

●Do not place the battery pack/batteries near or in direct ame.

This may cause the battery pack/batteries to explode or leak, resulting in

electrical shock, re, or injuries. If leaking battery electrolyte comes into

contact with eyes, mouth, skin, or clothing, immediately ush with water.

●If the product uses a battery charger, note the following precautions.

- Remove the plug periodically and, using a dry cloth, wipe away any

dust and dirt that has collected on the plug, the exterior of the power

outlet, and the surrounding area.

- Do not insert or remove the plug with wet hands.

- Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the rated

capacity of the electrical outlet or wiring accessories. Do not use if

the plug is damaged or not fully inserted in the outlet.

- Do not allow dust or metal objects (such as pins or keys) to contact

the terminals or plug.

- Do not cut, damage, alter, or place heavy items on the power cord, if

your product uses one.

This could result in electrical shock or re.

Safety Precautions

●Before using the product, ensure that you read the safety precautions

described below. Always ensure that the product is used correctly.

●The safety precautions noted here are intended to prevent you and

other persons from being injured or incurring property damage.

●Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately sold

accessories you use.

Warning

Denotes the possibility of serious injury or death.

●Do not trigger the ash in close proximity to people’s eyes.

This may damage eyesight. In particular, remain at least 1 meter (3.3 feet)

away from infants when using the ash.

●Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants.

A strap wound around a child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.

If your product uses a power cord, the cord becoming wound around a

child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.

The hot shoe cap is dangerous if swallowed. If swallowed, contact a

doctor immediately.

●Use only recommended power sources.

●Do not disassemble, alter, or apply heat to the product.

●Do not peel off the label, if the battery pack has one.

●Avoid dropping or subjecting the product to severe impacts.

●Do not touch the interior of the product if it is broken, such as when

dropped.

●Stop using the product immediately if it emits smoke or a strange

smell, or otherwise behaves abnormally.

●Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or thinner to

clean the product.

●Avoid contact with liquid, and do not allow liquid or foreign objects

inside.

Before Use

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

●When using optional lenses, lens lters, or lter adapters (if

applicable), be sure to attach these accessories rmly.

If the lens accessory becomes loose and falls off, it may crack, and the

shards of glass may lead to cuts.

●On products that raise and lower the ash automatically, make sure to

avoid pinching your ngers with the lowering ash.

This could result in injury.

Caution

Denotes the possibility of property damage.

●Do not aim the camera at intense light sources, such as the sun on a

clear day or an intense articial light source.

Doing so may damage the image sensor or other internal components.

●When using the camera on a sandy beach or at a windy location, be

careful not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera.

●On products that raise and lower the ash automatically, do not push

the ash down or pry it open.

This may cause the product to malfunction.

●Wipe off any dust, grime, or other foreign matter on the ash with a

cotton swab or cloth.

The heat emitted from the ash may cause foreign matter to smoke or the

product to malfunction.

●Remove and store the battery pack/batteries when you are not using

the product.

Any battery leakage that occurs may cause product damage.

●Before you discard the battery pack/batteries, cover the terminals with

tape or other insulators.

Contacting other metal materials may lead to re or explosions.

●Unplug any battery charger used with the product when not in use. Do

not cover with a cloth or other objects when in use.

Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to

overheat and distort, resulting in re.

●Turn the camera off in places where camera use is prohibited.

The electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the

operation of electronic instruments and other devices. Exercise adequate

caution when using the product in places where use of electronic devices

is restricted, such as inside airplanes and medical facilities.

●Do not allow the camera to maintain contact with skin for extended

periods.

Even if the camera does not feel hot, this may cause low-temperature

burns, manifested in redness of the skin or blistering. Use a tripod in hot

places, or if you have poor circulation or insensitive skin.

Caution

Denotes the possibility of injury.

●When carrying the product by the strap, be careful not to bang it,

subject it to strong impacts or shocks, or let it get caught on other

objects.

●Be careful not to bump or push strongly on the lens.

This could lead to injury or damage the camera.

●Be careful not to subject the screen to strong impacts.

If the screen cracks, injury may result from the broken fragments.

●When using the ash, be careful not to cover it with your ngers or

clothing.

This could result in burns or damage to the ash.

●Avoid using, placing, or storing the product in the following places:

- Places subject to direct sunlight

- Places subject to temperatures above 40°C (104°F)

- Humid or dusty places

These could cause leakage, overheating, or an explosion of the battery

pack/batteries, resulting in electrical shock, re, burns, or other injuries.

Overheating and damage may result in electrical shock, re, burns, or

other injuries.

●The slideshow transition effects may cause discomfort when viewed

for prolonged periods.

Before Use

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

●Do not leave any dedicated battery packs near pets.

Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overheating, or

explosion, resulting in product damage or re.

●If your product uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that

have different levels of charge together, and do not use old and

new batteries together. Do not insert the batteries with the + and –

terminals reversed.

This may cause the product to malfunction.

●Do not sit down with the camera in your pant pocket.

Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.

●When putting the camera in your bag, ensure that hard objects do not

come into contact with the screen. Also close the screen (so that it

faces the body), if your product’s screen closes.

●Do not attach any hard objects to the product.

Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.

Basic Guide

Before Use

Advanced Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Initial Preparations

Prepare for shooting as follows.

Attaching the Strap

●Attach the included strap to the camera

as shown.

●On the other side of the camera, attach

the strap the same way.

Charging the Battery Pack

Before use, charge the battery pack with the included charger. Be sure to

charge the battery pack initially, because the camera is not sold with the

battery pack charged.

1 Insert the battery pack.

●Remove the cover from the battery pack,

align the marks on the battery pack

and charger, and insert the battery pack

by pushing it in (1) and down (2).

2 Charge the battery pack.

●LC-E17: Flip out the plug (1), and plug

the charger into a power outlet (2).

LC-E17

Basic Operations

Basic information and instructions, from initial preparations to shooting

and playback

Basic Guide

Before Use

Advanced Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

●For details on charging time, see “Battery Charger LC-E17/

LC-E17E” (=

197). For details on the number of shots and

recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see

“Power Supplies” (=

195).

●Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when

they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately

before) the day of use.

●As a visual reminder of the charge status, attach the battery cover

with visible on a charged battery pack and concealed on an

uncharged one.

●The charger can be used in regions with 100–240 V AC

power (50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use

a commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an

electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage

the battery pack.

Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card

Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (sold separately).

Note that before using a new memory card (or a memory card formatted

in another device), you should format the memory card with this camera

138).

1 Open the cover.

●Slide the cover (1) and open it (2).

2 Insert the battery pack.

●Holding the battery pack with the

terminals (1) facing as shown, move the

battery lock down (2) and insert until the

lock clicks shut.

●If you insert the battery pack facing the

wrong way, it cannot be locked into the

correct position. Always conrm that the

battery pack is facing the right way and

locks when inserted.

●LC-E17E: Plug the power cord into the

charger and then plug the other end into

a power outlet.

●The charging lamp turns orange, and

charging begins.

●When charging is nished, the lamp turns

green.

3 Remove the battery pack.

●After unplugging the battery charger,

remove the battery pack by pushing it in

(1) and up (2).

●Do not touch the battery charger plug for approximately 5 sec.

after removing the charger from the outlet.

●To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not

charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.

●For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach

the charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in

malfunction or damage to the product.

●If an abnormality occurs with the battery charger, the protective

circuit stops charging, and the lamp blinks orange. In this

instance, unplug the charger from the outlet, remove and then

replace the battery pack, and wait a while before plugging it into

the outlet again.

LC-E17E

Basic Guide

Before Use

Advanced Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Remove the memory card.

●Push the memory card in until it clicks,

and then slowly release it.

●The memory card will pop up.

Setting the Date and Time

Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time] screen

is displayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specify this

way is recorded in image properties when you shoot, and it is used when

you manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date.

1 Turn the camera on.

●Press the power button.

●The [Date/Time] screen is displayed.

2 Set the date and time.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an

option.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to specify the date.

●When nished, press the [ ] button.

3 Specify your home time zone.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose your

home time zone.

3 Check the card’s write-protect tab

and insert the memory card.

●Recording is not possible on memory

cards with a write-protect tab when the

tab is in the locked position. Slide the tab

to the unlocked position (1).

●Insert the memory card with the label (2)

facing as shown until it clicks into place.

●Make sure the memory card is facing the

right way when you insert it. Inserting

memory cards facing the wrong way may

damage the camera.

4 Close the cover.

●Lower the cover (1) and hold it down as

you slide it, until it clicks into the closed

position (2).

●Look at the screen display for the number of shots and movie

length that can be shot with the current card (=

23).

Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card

Remove the battery pack.

●Open the cover and press the battery

lock in the direction of the arrow.

●The battery pack will pop up.

Basic Guide

Before Use

Advanced Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Changing the Date and Time

Adjust the date and time as follows.

1 Access the menu screen.

●Press the [ ] button.

2 Choose [Date/Time].

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or use the [ ]

dial to select the [ 2] tab.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the

[ ] dial to choose [Date/Time], and then

press the [ ] button.

3 Change the date/time.

●Follow step 2 in “Setting the Date and

Time” (=

18) to adjust the settings.

●Press the [ ] button to close the

menu screen.

●The camera includes a built-in date/time battery (backup battery).

Date/time settings are retained for about 3 weeks after the battery

pack is removed.

●The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you

insert a charged battery pack or connect the camera to an AC

adapter kit (sold separately, =

148), even if the camera is left

off.

●Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will

be displayed when you turn the camera on. Set the correct date

and time as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (=

18).

4 Finish the setup process.

●Press the [ ] button when nished.

After a conrmation message, the setting

screen is no longer displayed.

●To turn off the camera, press the power

button.

●Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/

Time] screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on.

Specify the correct information.

●To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [ ] in step 2

and then choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning

the [ ] dial.

●You can also set the date and time by touching the desired option

on the screen shown in step 2 and then touching [ ][ ] to

adjust values, followed by [ ]. Similarly, to select your time

zone in the screen shown in step 3, touch [ ][ ] to choose your

time zone and then touch [ ] to conrm.

Basic Guide

Before Use

Advanced Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Attaching a Lens

The camera is compatible with EF-M lenses. Use the Mount Adapter EF-

EOS M to attach EF and EF-S lenses as well (=

21).

1 Make sure the camera is off.

2 Remove the caps.

●Remove the rear lens cap and the body

cap by turning them as shown by the

arrows.

3 Attach the lens.

●Align the mount indexes (the white

circles) on the lens and camera, and turn

the lens until it clicks into place, as shown

by the arrow.

4 Remove the front lens cap.

●Turn the zoom ring on the lens to zoom.

●Zoom before focusing, because the

image may become unfocused if you

focus before zooming.

Display Language

Change the display language as needed.

1 Enter Playback mode.

●Press the [ ] button.

2 Access the setting screen.

●Press and hold the [ ] button, and then

press the [ ] button.

3 Set the display language.

●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn

the [ ] dial to choose a language, and

then press the [ ] button.

●Once the display language has been set,

the setting screen is no longer displayed.

●You can also change the display language by pressing the

[] button and choosing [Language ] on the [ 2] tab.

●You can also set the display language by touching a language on

the screen in step 3 and then touching it again.

Basic Guide

Before Use

Advanced Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Attaching EF and EF-S Lenses

If you use Mount Adapter EF-EOS M, you can use EF and EF-S lenses.

1 Make sure the camera is off.

2 Remove the caps.

●Remove the caps, following step 2 in

“Attaching a Lens” (=

20).

3 Attach the lens to the adapter.

●To mount an EF lens, align the mount

indexes (the red circles) on the lens and

adapter, and turn the lens until it clicks

into place, as shown by the arrow.

●To mount an EF-S lens, align the mount

indexes (the white squares) on the lens

and adapter, and turn the lens until it

clicks into place, as shown by the arrow.

4 Attach the adapter to the camera.

●Align the mount indexes (the white

circles) on the adapter and camera. Turn

the lens as shown by the arrow until it

clicks into place.

●To protect the lens, keep the lens cap on when the camera is not

in use.

Detaching a Lens

●Make sure the camera is off.

●While pressing the lens release button

(1), turn the lens as shown by the arrow

(2).

●Turn the lens until it stops and then

detach it (3).

●Attach the lens cap to the detached lens.

●Minimizing Dust

- When changing lenses, do it quickly in a place with minimal

dust.

- When storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to

attach the body cap to the camera.

- Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it.

●The image sensor is smaller than the 35mm format, which causes

the attached lens’s focal length to appear magnied about 1.6x.

For example, an 18–55 mm focal length would be equivalent to

an approx. 29–88 mm focal length on a 35mm camera.

Lens Instruction Manual

Download electronic manuals for your lens from the following Internet

address.

http://www.canon.com/icpd/

Basic Guide

Before Use

Advanced Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Using a Tripod

Use the tripod foot included with the adapter to attach the camera to a

tripod. Do not use the camera’s tripod socket.

●Attach the tripod foot to the adapter. Use

the turning dial to secure it rmly in place.

●Attach the tripod to the socket of the

tripod foot.

●If using an EF lens with a tripod foot (such as super telephoto

lenses), attach the tripod foot socket directly to the tripod.

Stabilizing the Image

If using a lens with an image stabilization function, you can compensate

for small camera movements (shaking) that occur while shooting. Lenses

with built-in image stabilization have “IS” in their names.

●Move the lens’s image stabilizer switch to

the [ON] position.

●If using a lens that is heavier than the camera, make sure support

is provided for the lens while carrying and shooting.

●Using adapters may extend the minimum shooting distance of the

lens or change its maximum magnication ratio or shooting range.

●If the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during

autofocusing, do not touch the rotating part.

●The focus preset function on some super telephoto lenses is

unavailable. Also, the power zoom function of lens EF35–80mm

f/4–5.6 PZ is unavailable.

Detaching a Lens

1 Detach the adapter.

●Make sure the camera is off.

●While pressing the lens release button,

turn the adapter (with lens attached) as

shown by the arrow.

●Turn the adapter until it stops and then

detach it.

2 Detach the lens.

●While pushing down on the detach

lever on the adapter, turn the lens

counterclockwise.

●Turn the lens until it stops and then

detach it.

●Attach the lens cap to the detached lens.

Basic Guide

Before Use

Advanced Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Shooting in Scene Intelligent Auto Mode

For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specic scenes,

simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.

1 Turn the camera on.

●Press the power button.

2 Enter [ ] mode.

●Set the mode dial to [ ].

●A scene icon (1) is displayed in the upper

left of the screen.

●The top of the screen shows the number

of shots (2) and length of movie (3) you

can shoot with the current card.

●Frames displayed around any detected

faces or other subjects indicate that they

are in focus.

3 Compose the shot.

●If your lens supports zooming, turn the

zoom ring on the lens with your ngers

to zoom.

Trying the Camera Out

Still Images Movies

Follow these instructions to turn the camera on, shoot still images or

movies, and then view them.

Holding the Camera

To obtain sharp images, hold the camera still to minimize camera shake.

(1) Wrap your right hand around the camera grip rmly.

(2) Hold the lens bottom with your left hand.

(3) Rest your hand’s right index nger lightly on the shutter button.

(4) Press your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body.

(5) To maintain a stable stance, place one foot slightly ahead of the

other.

●When shooting movies, be careful not to

cover the microphones (1).

●When your press the shutter button

halfway in dark locations, the front lamp

(2) may light up to improve focus. Make

sure this light is not blocked by anything.

Horizontal shooting Vertical shooting

Basic Guide

Before Use

Advanced Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Recording Movies

1) Start recording.

●Press the Movie button to begin

recording. [ Rec] is displayed with the

elapsed time.

●Displays black bars on the top and

bottom edges of the screen. The black

bars indicate image areas not recorded.

●Frames displayed around any detected

faces indicate that they are in focus.

●Once recording begins, take your nger

off the movie button.

2) Finish recording.

●To stop movie recording, press the movie

button again.

●An orange AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot

focus when you press the shutter button halfway. No picture is

taken, even if you press the shutter button all the way down.

●If using a lens that supports Dynamic IS (=

78), the camera

adjusts the range displayed on-screen to make the subject larger

once you begin shooting a movie.

4 Shoot.

Shooting Still Images

1) Focus.

●Press the shutter button lightly, halfway

down. The camera beeps twice after

focusing, and AF frames are displayed to

indicate image areas in focus.

●If [ ] ashes on-screen, move the [ ]

switch to raise the ash. The ash will re

upon shooting. If you prefer not to use the

ash, push it down with your nger, into

the camera.

2) Shoot.

●Press the shutter button all the way down

to shoot. In low-light conditions, the ash

res automatically when you have it

raised.

●The captured image will be displayed for

approximately 2 seconds on the screen.

●Even while the shot is displayed, you can

take another shot by pressing the shutter

button again.

Basic Guide

Before Use

Advanced Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

3 Play movies.

●Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ]

buttons to choose [ ], and then press the

[ ] button again.

●

Playback now begins, and after the movie

is nished, [

] is displayed.

●To adjust the volume during playback,

press the [ ][ ] buttons.

●To switch to shooting mode from playback mode, press the

shutter button down halfway (=

28), press the [ ] button, or

turn the mode dial.

●You can also start movie playback by touching [ ]. To adjust

the volume, drag quickly up or down across the screen during

playback.

Viewing

After shooting still images and movies, you can view them on the screen

as follows.

1 Enter Playback mode.

●Press the [ ] button.

●Your last shot is displayed.

2 Choose images.

●To view the previous image, press

the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial

counterclockwise. To view the next

image, press the [ ] button or turn the

[ ] dial clockwise.

●Press and hold the [ ][ ] buttons to

browse through images quickly.

●To access Scroll Display mode, turn the

[] dial rapidly. In this mode, turn the [ ]

dial to browse through images.

●To return to single-image display, press

the [ ] button.

●Movies are identied by a [ ] icon.

To play movies, go to step 3.

Basic Guide

Before Use

Advanced Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Erasing Images

You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful

when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered.

1 Choose an image to erase.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose an image.

2 Erase the images.

●Press the [ ] button.

●After [Erase?] is displayed, press the

[][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to

choose [Erase], and then press the [ ]

button.

●The current image is now erased.

●To cancel erasure, press the [ ][ ]

buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose

[Cancel], and then press the [ ] button.

●You can choose multiple images to erase at once (=

105).

●You can also erase the current image by touching [Erase] on the

screen in step 2.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

On/Off

Shooting Mode

●Press the power button to turn the

camera on and prepare for shooting.

●To turn the camera off, press the power

button again.

Playback Mode

●Press the [ ] button to turn the camera

on and view your shots.

●Press the [ ] button again to go to

shooting mode.

●To turn off the camera, press the power

button.

●When an EF-M lens is attached to the camera and the power is

off, the aperture stops down to reduce the amount of light entering

the camera and protect the internal components of the camera.

As a result, when you turn the camera on or off, the aperture

makes a small noise as it opens or closes.

●When you turn the camera on or off, sensor cleaning will be

executed automatically. (A small sound may be heard.) After

turning on the camera, the LCD monitor will display the [ ] icon

while the sensor is being cleaned. The [ ] icon may not be

displayed if you turn the camera on and off rapidly over a short

period of time.

●To switch to shooting mode from playback mode, press the

shutter button down halfway (=

28), press the [ ] button, or

turn the mode dial.

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Other basic operations and more ways to enjoy your camera, including

shooting and playback options

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Shutter Button

To ensure that you focus on the intended subject when shooting, rst

lightly press the shutter button halfway down to focus, and then press the

button all the way down to shoot.

In this manual, shutter button operations are described as pressing the

button halfway or all the way down.

1 Press halfway. (Press lightly to

focus.)

●Press the shutter button halfway. The

camera beeps twice, and frames are

displayed around image areas in focus.

2 Press all the way down. (From the

halfway position, press fully to

shoot.)

●The shot is taken.

●Your intended subject may be out of focus if you shoot without

initially pressing the shutter button halfway.

Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)

As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates

the screen (Display Off) and then turns itself off after a specic period of

inactivity.

Power Saving in Shooting Mode

The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute of

inactivity. In about two more minutes, the camera turns itself off. To

activate the screen and prepare for shooting when the screen is off but the

(rear) indicator lamp is still on, press the shutter button halfway (=

28).

Power Saving in Playback Mode

The camera turns itself off automatically after about ve minutes of

inactivity.

●You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of

Display Off, if you prefer (=

140).

●Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to

other devices via Wi-Fi (=

115) or connected to a computer

159).

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Adjusting the Angle of the LCD

Monitor

You can adjust the screen angle and orientation to suit the scene or how

you are shooting.

Tilting the Screen Downward

●Pull the top of the screen down toward

you.

●The screen can be tilted downward

approximately 45°.

Tilting the Screen Upward

●Pull the bottom of the screen forward until

it clicks (1), slide the screen down (2),

and then rotate it upward (3).

●The screen can be tilted upward

approximately 180°.

●When you want to shoot from the front

of the camera, rotate the LCD monitor

upward to view the screen from the lens

side. The mirror image of the scene is

displayed (the image is rotated 180° on

the vertical axis).

●When nished, rotate the screen

downward (1) and then slide it up while

pushing in until it clicks (2).

Shooting Modes

Use the mode dial to access each shooting mode.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(1) Scene Intelligent Auto Mode/

Hybrid Auto Mode

Fully automatic shooting, with

camera-determined settings

35, =

37).

(2) Creative Assist Mode

Get the results and effects you

want quickly and easily. Settings

can also be saved and loaded

48).

(3) Special Scene Mode

Shoot with optimal settings for

specic scenes (=

51).

(4) , , , , Modes

Take a variety of shots using

your preferred settings (=

60,

82, =

83, =

84, =

90).

(5) Movie Mode

For shooting movies (=

57,

86). You can also shoot

movies when the mode dial is

not set to Movie mode, simply by

pressing the movie button.

(6) Creative Filters Mode

Add a variety of effects to images

when shooting (=

52).

●You can turn the mode dial to switch to shooting mode from

playback mode.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Shooting Display Options

Press the [ ] button to switch between displaying shooting

information, the grid lines and level.

This can be dened in more detail on the [ 1] tab, under [Shooting

information display] (=

87).

●Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night view

function when you are shooting under low light, making it easier

to check how shots are composed. However, on-screen image

brightness may not match the brightness of your shots. Note that

any on-screen image distortion or jerky subject motion will not

affect recorded images.

●For playback display options, see “Switching Display Modes”

95).

●Keep the screen closed when the camera is not in use.

●Do not try to open the screen beyond the angles described, as

this may damage it.

●Go to the Menu (=

32) and set [Reverse Disp.] to [Off] on the

[1] tab to turn off the mirror-image function.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

4 Finish the setup process.

●Press the [ ] button.

●The screen before you pressed the

[] button in step 1 is displayed again,

showing the option you congured.

●To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the

camera’s default settings (=

145).

●Select [ ] in the menu and press the [ ] button to close the

options.

Using Touch-Screen Operations to Congure

Settings

●Touch the [ ] button on the upper right

of the screen to open the Quick Setting

menu.

●Touch the on-screen menu options to

make selections.

●Touch [ ] within a menu option, or touch

the currently selected option, to go back

to the previous screen.

●You can access the screen for options

labeled with a [ ] icon by touching

[ ].

Using the Quick Setting Menu

Commonly used functions can be congured in the (Quick Setting)

menu.

Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode

179) or playback mode (=

188).

1 Access the menu.

●Press the [ ] button.

2 Choose a menu item.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a

menu item (1).

●Available options (2) are shown at the

bottom of the screen.

3 Choose an option.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the

[ ][ ] dials to select an option.

●Options labeled with a [ ] icon can

be congured by pressing the [ ]

button.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

4 Choose an option.

●For options with a vertical menu of

selections available, press the [ ][ ]

buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose a

selection.

●For options with a horizontal menu, press

the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to

choose an option.

5 Finish the setup process.

●When nished, press the [ ] button to

return to option selection.

●Press the [ ] button to return to the

screen displayed before you pressed the

[ ] button in step 1.

●To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the

camera’s default settings (=

145).

●Available menu items vary depending on the selected shooting or

playback mode (=

181 – =

188).

Using the Menu Screen

Congure a variety of camera functions through the menu screen as

follows.

1 Access the menu screen.

●Press the [ ] button.

2 Choose a tab.

●Use the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to select a tab.

●There are two kinds of tabs: System tabs

(1) related to shooting [ ], playback

[ ], settings [ ] and more, and the

individual page tabs (2) under each

system tab. This guide refers to both tab

types together in the text (example: the

“[ 1] tab”).

3 Choose a menu item.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose a menu item, and then

press the [ ] button.

●For menu items with options not shown,

rst press the [ ] button to switch

screens, and then either press the [ ][ ]

buttons or turn the [ ] dial to select the

menu item.

●To return to the previous screen, press

the [ ] button.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

On-Screen Keyboard

Use the on-screen keyboard to enter information for Wi-Fi connections

115). Note that the length and type of information you can enter

varies depending on the function you are using.

Entering Characters

●Touch the characters to enter them.

●The amount of information you can enter

(1) varies depending on the function you

are using.

Moving the Cursor

●Touch [ ][ ].

Entering Line Breaks

●Touch [ ].

Switching Input Modes

●Touch [ ] to switch between numbers

and symbols.

●Touch [ ] to enter capital letters.

●Available input modes vary depending on

the function you are using.

Deleting Characters

●Touch [ ] to delete the previous

character.

Conrming Input and Returning to the

Previous Screen

●Touch [ ].

Touch-Screen Operations

●To access tabs, press the [ ] button to access the menu, touch a

system tab, and then a page tab to select a menu tab.

●Touch the desired setting to select it and then touch it again.

●When nished, touch the option to return to the menu screen.

●To congure menu items for which options are not shown, rst touch

the menu item to access the setting screen. To return to the previous

screen, touch [ ].

●You can also touch input elements (such as check boxes or text elds)

to select them, and you can enter text by touching the on-screen

keyboard.

●The [ ] and [ ] on-screen buttons have the same functions as

the [ ] and [ ] buttons.

●To dismiss the menu, press the [ ] button again.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Indicator Display

The indicator on the back of the camera (=

3) lights up or blinks

depending on the camera status.

Color Indicator

Status Camera Status

Green

On Connected to a computer (=

159), or display

off (=

28, =

139, =

140)

Blinking

Starting up, recording/reading/transmitting

images, shooting long exposures (=

82,

84), or connecting/transmitting via Wi-Fi

●When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera off, open

the memory card/battery cover, or shake or jolt the camera, which

may corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card.

●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to select

characters and icons. Press the [ ] button to make entries. Turn

the [ ] dial to move the cursor directly between characters.

Press the [ ] button to go back to the previous screen.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Shooting with Camera-

Determined Settings

For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specic scenes,

simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.

Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)

Still Images Movies

1 Turn the camera on.

●Press the power button.

2 Enter [ ] mode.

●Set the mode dial to [ ].

●A scene icon is displayed in the upper left

of the screen (=

39).

●Frames are displayed around faces

and subjects that have been detected,

indicating that they are in focus.

3 Compose the shot.

●If your lens supports zooming, turn the

zoom ring on the lens with your ngers

to zoom.

Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode

Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control over shooting

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Recording Movies

1) Start recording.

●Press the movie button. Recording

begins, and [ Rec] is displayed with the

elapsed time.

●Black bars displayed on the top and

bottom edges of the screen indicate

image areas not recorded.

●Frames displayed around any detected

faces indicate that they are in focus.

●Once recording begins, take your nger

off the movie button.

2) Resize the subject and recompose

the shot as needed.

●To resize the subject, repeat the

operations in step 3.

However, note that the sound of camera

operations will be recorded.

●When you recompose shots, the

focus, brightness, and colors will be

automatically adjusted.

3) Finish recording.

●To stop movie recording, press the movie

button again.

●Recording will stop automatically when

the memory card becomes full.

4 Shoot.

Shooting Still Images

1) Focus.

●Press the shutter button halfway. The

camera beeps twice after focusing, and

AF frames are displayed to indicate

image areas in focus.

●If [ ] ashes on-screen, move the [ ]

switch to raise the ash. It will re when

shooting. If you prefer not to use the

ash, push it down with your nger, into

the camera.

2) Shoot.

●Press the shutter button all the way down

to shoot. In low-light conditions, the ash

res automatically when you have it

raised.

●The captured image will be displayed for

approximately 2 seconds on the screen.

●Even while the shot is displayed, you can

take another shot by pressing the shutter

button again.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

●The quality of digest movies is [ ] (in NTSC) or

[] (in PAL). This is dependent on your video format

settings (=

139).

●Sounds are not played when you press the shutter button halfway

or trigger the self-timer.

●Digest movies are saved as separate movie les in the following

cases even if they were recorded on the same day in [ ] mode.

- The digest movie le size reaches approximately 4 GB, or the

total recording time reaches approximately 13 minutes and 20

seconds.

- The digest movie is protected (=

102).

- Daylight saving time (=

18), video system (=

139), time

zone settings (=

141) or copyright information (=

144) are

changed.

- A new folder is created (=

137).

●Recorded shutter sounds cannot be modied or erased.

●If you prefer to record digest movies without still images, adjust

the setting in advance. Choose MENU (=

32) > [ 4] tab >

[Digest Type] > [No Stills] (=

32).

●Individual chapters can be edited (=

114).

Digest Movie Playback

Display a still image shot in [ ] mode to play the digest movie created

on the same day, or specify the date of the digest movie to play (=

96).

Still Images/Movies

●If the camera is turned on while the [ ] button is held

down, the camera will no longer sound. To activate sounds again,

press the [ ] button and choose [Beep] on the [ 3] tab,

and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [On].

Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode

Still Images Movies

You can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still images. The

camera records 2 – 4-second clips of scenes before each shot, which are

later combined in a digest movie.

1 Enter [ ] mode.

●Follow step 2 in “Shooting (Scene

Intelligent Auto)” (=

35), and choose

[ ].

2 Compose the shot.

●Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Shooting (Scene

Intelligent Auto)” (=

35) to compose

the shot and focus.

●For more impressive digest movies,

aim the camera at subjects about four

seconds before shooting still images.

3 Shoot.

●Follow step 4 in “Shooting (Scene

Intelligent Auto)” (=

36) to shoot a still

image.

●The camera records both a still image

and movie clip. The clip, which ends with

the still image and a shutter sound, forms

a single chapter in the digest movie.

●Battery life is shorter in this mode than in [ ] mode, because

digest movies are recorded for each shot.

●A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image

immediately after turning the camera on, choosing [ ] mode, or

operating the camera in other ways.

●Sounds and vibrations from operating the camera or lens will be

recorded in digest movies.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Movies

●The camera may become warm when shooting movies repeatedly

over an extended period. This does not indicate damage.

●Keep your ngers away from the microphone (1) while shooting

movies. Blocking the microphone may prevent audio from being

recorded or may cause the recording to sound mufed.

●Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button

and touch-screen controls when shooting movies. Sounds

made by the camera will be recorded. Touch-screen control is

recommended when adjusting settings while shooting movies.

●The sounds of the lens and camera operating are also recorded.

This can be reduced by using an external microphone (sold

separately) (=

157).

●If using a lens that supports Dynamic IS (=

78), the image

display area changes and subjects are enlarged once movie

recording begins to allow correction of signicant camera shake.

To shoot subjects at the same size shown before shooting, adjust

the image stabilization setting (=

78).

Still Images

●An orange AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot

focus when you press the shutter button halfway. No picture is

taken, even if you press the shutter button all the way down.

●When no people or subjects are detected, when the subject

is dark or has no contrast, or in extremely bright conditions, it

may take longer to achieve focus, or correct focus may not be

achieved.

●A blinking [ ] icon warns that images are more likely to be

blurred by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a

tripod or take other measures to keep it still.

●If your shots are dark despite the ash ring, move closer to the

subject. For details on the ash range, see “Internal Flash Range

Guide” (=

196).

●To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be lit

when the shutter button is pressed halfway in low-light conditions.

●If the ash res, vignetting may occur depending on the lens

being used.

●A blinking [ ] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot

indicates that shooting is not possible until the ash has nished

recharging. Shooting can resume as soon as the ash is ready,

so either press the shutter button all the way down and wait, or

release it and press it again.

●Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen

is displayed, your previous shot may determine the focus,

brightness, and colors used.

●The display shown right after shooting and before the saved

image is shown will feature vignetting.

●You can change how long images are displayed after shots

47).

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Background

When Shooting Other Subjects Icon

Background

Color

Other

Subjects In Motion At Close

Range

Bright Gray

Bright and Backlit

With Blue Sky

Light Blue

Blue Sky and

Backlit

Sunsets – – Orange

Spotlights –

Dark Blue

Dark

Dark, Using

Tripod – –

●The “In Motion” icons are not displayed when the self-timer (=

40)

is on, when in [ ] mode, or when shooting a movie.

●The “When Shooting People” and “In Motion” icons are not displayed

when the lens is set to or you are using a lens that cannot

autofocus.

●Try shooting in [ ] mode (=

60) if the scene icon does not

match actual shooting conditions, or if it is not possible to shoot

with your expected effect, color, or brightness.

●Audio is recorded in stereo.

●The focus automatically adjusts while shooting movies, which

may cause the sound of the lens operating to be recorded. Using

an external microphone (sold separately) may help reduce these

lens sounds. If you do not want to record sound, go to the menu

32), select the [ 5] tab, and set [Sound recording] to

[Disable].

●Go to the Menu (=

32), select the [ 5] tab, and set [Movie

Servo AF] to [Disable] to keep the focus xed during movie

recording.

●Movies that take up over 4 GB of space in a single shooting

are divided into multiple les. The movie shooting time on the

shooting screen ashes for approximately 30 sec. before the

movie reaches 4 GB in size. If you continue shooting and exceed

4 GB, the camera automatically creates a new movie le and

ashing stops. Divided movie les cannot be automatically played

in sequence. Each movie has to be viewed separately.

Scene Icons

Still Images Movies

In [ ] and [ ] modes, shooting scenes determined by the camera

are indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are

automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color.

Background

When Shooting People Icon

Background

Color

People In Motion

Bright Gray

Bright and Backlit

With Blue Sky Light Blue

Blue Sky and Backlit

Spotlights –

Dark Blue

Dark –

Dark, Using Tripod –

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Common, Convenient Features

Still Images Movies

Using the Self-Timer

Still Images Movies

With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other

timed shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the

shutter button.

1 Congure the setting.

●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the

menu, and then choose [ ] (=

31).

●Once the setting is complete, [ ] is

displayed.

2 Shoot.

●For still images: press the shutter button

halfway to focus on the subject, and then

press it all the way down.

●For movies: press the movie button.

On-Screen Frames

Still Images Movies

A variety of frames are displayed once the camera detects subjects you

are aiming the camera at.

●A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face)

determined by the camera to be the main subject. The frame follows

moving subjects within a certain range to keep them in focus.

●Press the shutter button halfway to focus. Once the scene is in focus,

the frame will turn green.

●In [ ] mode, if you press the shutter button halfway when the subject

is determined to be in motion, the frame will turn blue and the focus

and brightness will be recalibrated (servo AF). Once back in focus, the

frame will turn green.

●An orange AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot focus

when you press the shutter button halfway.

●Try shooting in [ ] mode (=

60) if no frames are displayed, if

frames are not displayed around desired subjects, or if frames are

displayed on the background or similar areas.

●Set [AF auto switch] to [Disable] on the [ 4] tab to turn off servo

AF. This turns off the “In Motion” icons (=

39). [AF auto switch]

is automatically set to [Disable] if the self-timer (=

40) is set to

anything besides [ ].

●To choose subjects to focus on, touch the desired subject on the

screen. [ ] is displayed, and the camera enters Touch AF mode.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Shooting by Touching the Screen (Touch

Shutter)

Still Images Movies

With this option, instead of pressing the shutter button, you can simply

touch the screen and release your nger to shoot. The camera will focus

on subjects and adjust image brightness automatically.

1 Enable touch-shutter function.

●Press the [ ] button, choose [Touch

Shutter] on the [ 1] tab, and then

choose [Enable] (=

32).

2 Shoot.

●Touch the subject on the screen to take

the picture.

●To cancel touch shutter, choose [Disable]

in step 1.

●If focus is not achieved, the AF frame turns orange and images

cannot be taken.

●Even while the shot is displayed, you can prepare for the next

shot by touching [ ].

●Once you start the self-timer, the lamp

will blink and the camera will play a self-

timer sound.

●Two seconds before the shot, the blinking

and sound will speed up. (The lamp will

remain lit in case the ash res.)

●To cancel shooting after you have

triggered the self-timer, press the

[] button.

●To restore the original setting, choose [ ]

in step 1.

Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake

Still Images Movies

This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you

have pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are

pressing the shutter button, it will not affect your shot.

●Follow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”

40) and choose [ ].

●Once the setting is complete, [ ] is

displayed.

●Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”

40) to shoot.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

●During continuous shooting, focus, exposure and color tone are

locked at the position/level determined when you pressed the

shutter button halfway.

●Cannot be used with the self-timer (=

40).

●Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow

down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the

zoom position.

●As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.

●There may be a delay after continuous shooting before you can

shoot again, depending on the card type used and how many

images were shot.

●Shooting may slow down if the ash res.

●With Touch Shutter (=

41), the camera shoots continuously

while you touch the screen. Focus, exposure and color tone

during continuous shooting remain constant, after they are

determined for the rst shot.

●Images shown on-screen during continuous shooting differ from

the actual images and may look out of focus. Also, depending on

the lens used, the image displayed on-screen may appear darker

during continuous shooting. However, the images are recorded

with standard brightness.

●If the number of images that can be continually shot (burst image

count) is 1 – 9, the number of continual shots left is displayed

to the right of the total remaining shots at the top of the screen

174). This is not shown if you can shoot 10 or more

continuous images.

●The number of continuous images you can shoot may decrease

depending on the shooting scene or your camera settings.

Continuous Shooting

Still Images Movies

In [ ] mode, hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot

continuously.

For details on the continuous shooting speed, see “Drive, Self-timer

System” (=

192).

1 Congure the setting.

●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the

menu, and then choose [ ] (=

31).

●Once the setting is complete, [ ] is

displayed.

2 Shoot.

●Hold the shutter button all the way down

to shoot continuously.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

If selecting resolution based on paper size, use the following table as a

guide (when using 3:2 aspect ratio).

A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.)

A3 (11.7 x 16.5 in.)

A4 (8.3 x 11.7 in.)

3.5 x 5 in., 5 x 7 in., Postcard

For e-mailing and similar purposes

Saving RAW Images

This camera can record images in JPEG and RAW formats.

JPEG

Images

Images are processed in the camera for optimal

image quality and compressed to reduce le size.

However, the compression process is irreversible,

and images cannot be restored to their original,

unprocessed state. Image processing may also

cause some loss of image quality.

RAW Images

The “raw” (unprocessed) data, recorded with

essentially no loss of image quality from the

camera’s image processing. The data cannot be

used in this state for viewing on a computer or

printing. You must rst use the software (Digital

Photo Professional) (=

158) to convert images to

ordinary JPEG or TIFF les. Images can be adjusted

with minimal loss of image quality.

Image Customization Features

Changing Image Quality

Still Images Movies

You can select the resolution (size) and quality (compression ratio) of

your recorded images from a combination of 8 types. You can also dene

whether to save RAW images (=

43) or not. For guidelines on how

many shots at each quality setting can t on a memory card, see “Number

of Shots per Memory Card” (=

195).

●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the

menu, and choose the desired option

31).

●The option you congured is now

displayed.

●To restore the original setting, repeat this

process but choose [ ].

●[ ] and [ ] indicate the different levels of image quality caused

by different compression rates. If using the same resolution, [ ]

will produce better image quality. [ ] will result in slightly lower

image quality, but will enable you to record more images. [ ] and

[] feature [ ] image quality.

●Not available in [ ] mode.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Using the Menu

●Press the [ ] button, choose

[Image quality] on the [ 1] tab, and then

press the [ ] button (=

32).

●Turn the [ ] dial to choose

[] in [RAW]. This will save a RAW le

alongside the JPEG le. Select [–], and

the camera will only save the JPEG le.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the

[ ] dial to change [JPEG], selecting

your preferred save resolution and

compression ratio. Select [–], and the

camera will only save the RAW le.

●When nished, press the [ ] button to

return to the menu screen.

●You cannot set both the [RAW] and [JPEG] image setting to [–] at

the same time.

●Press the [ ] button, and then choose

[ ] in the menu (=

31).

●If you want to save only the RAW image,

select [ ].

●To save both a JPEG and a RAW image,

select your desired image quality in

the setting screen and then press the

[] button to add a [ ] to [RAW].

To go back to the original save method,

remove the [ ] from [RAW].

●When transferring RAW images (or RAW and JPEG images

recorded together) to a computer, always use the dedicated

software “EOS Utility” (=

158).

●For details on resolution and the number of shots that will t on a

card, see “Number of Shots per Memory Card” (=

195).

●The le extension for JPEG images is .JPG, and the extension for

RAW images is .CR2. JPEG and RAW images recorded together

will have the same image number in their lenames.

●Consult “Software” (=

158) to learn more about the Digital

Photo Professional and EOS Utility software.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Changing Movie Image Quality

Still Images Movies

You can set the quality (image size and frame rate) of movies. The frame

rate (number of frames recorded per second) is determined by your video

format settings (=

139). For guidelines on the maximum movie length at

each level of image quality that will t on a memory card, see “Recording

Time per Memory Card” (=

196).

●Press the [ ] button, choose [Movie rec.

size] in the menu, and choose the desired

option (=

31).

●The option you congured is now

displayed.

Video format set to [NTSC]

Image

Quality Resolution Frame Rate Details

1920 x 1080 29.97 fps For shooting in Full

HD. [ ] enables

shooting with a

cinematic frame rate.

1920 x 1080 23.98 fps

1280 x 720 59.94 fps For shooting in HD

640 x 480 29.97 fps For shooting in

standard denition

Changing the Aspect Ratio

Still Images Movies

Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows.

●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the

menu, and choose the desired option

31).

●Once the setting is complete, the screen

aspect ratio will be updated.

●To restore the original setting, repeat this

process but choose [ ].

Used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar display devices.

Same aspect ratio as 35mm lm, used for printing images at 5 x

7-inch or postcard sizes.

Used for printing images at 3.5 x 5-inch or A-series sizes.

Square aspect ratio.

●Not available in [ ] mode.

●This can also be dened in the menu (=

32) by going to the

[1] tab and choosing the [Still Image Aspect Ratio] option.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Using the Dual Axis Electronic

Level

Still Images Movies

An electronic level can be displayed as a guideline to ensure the camera

is level from front to back and left to right.

1 Display the electronic level.

●Press the [ ] button several times to

display the electronic level.

2 Straighten the camera.

●(1) indicates the front-back orientation

and (2) the left-right orientation.

●If the camera is tilted, move it so that the

red line changes to green.

●If the electronic level is not displayed in step 1, go to the menu

32) and check your settings in the [Shooting information

display] option on the [ 1] tab (=

87).

●The electronic level is not displayed in [ ] mode or during

movie recording.

●If you hold the camera vertically, the orientation of the electronic

level will be updated automatically to match the camera

orientation.

●Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you

level the camera (=

139).

Video format set to [PAL]

Image

Quality Resolution Frame Rate Details

1920 x 1080 25.00 fps For shooting in Full HD

1280 x 720 50.00 fps For shooting in HD

640 x 480 25.00 fps For shooting in

standard denition

●[ ] and [ ] will display black bars on the left and

right sides of the screen. [ ], [ ], [ ],

[], and [ ] will display black bars on the top and

bottom of the screen. The black bars indicate image areas not

recorded.

●This can be set up in the menu (=

32) by going to the [ 5]

tab and choosing the [Movie rec. size] option.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Changing the Image Display Period after Shots

Still Images Movies

●Press the [ ] button, choose

[Image review] on the [ 1] tab, and then

choose the desired option.

●To restore the original setting, repeat this

process but choose [2 sec.].

2 sec.,

4 sec.,

8 sec.

Displays images for the specied time. Even while the shot is

displayed, you can take another shot by pressing the shutter

button halfway again.

Hold Displays images until you press the shutter button halfway.

Off No image display after shots.

●By pressing the [ ] button while an image is displayed after

shooting, you can switch the display information.

Customizing Camera Operation

Customize shooting functions on the [ ] tab of the menu screen as

follows.

For instructions on menu functions, see “Using the Menu Screen”

32).

Preventing the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp from

Lighting Up

Still Images Movies

You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp that lights up to reduce

red-eye when the ash is used in low-light shots.

1 Access the [Flash Control] screen.

●Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash

Control] on the [ 3] tab, and then press

the [ ] button (=

32).

2 Congure the setting.

●Choose [Red-eye reduc.], and then

choose [Off] (=

32).

●To restore the original setting, repeat this

process but choose [On].

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Shooting with Your Favorite

Settings (Creative Assist)

Even if you don’t know much about photography, you can select from on-

screen options written in plain English to change the brightness, blur the

background, and take pictures that are all your own. You can also save

your favorite settings and easily load them back in later. Settings can even

be applied from images shot in [ ] mode.

When you display images shot in [ ] mode, the camera can show you

which [ ] mode settings correspond to which camera settings, making it

easier to step up to the Creative Auto shooting modes ([ ], [ ], [ ],

or [ ]).

The following options can be changed.

Background

This lets you dene how the background appears.

The higher the value this is, the sharper the

background gets. The lower the value, the more

blurred the background.

Brightness This lets you adjust the image brightness. The

higher this value, the brighter the image is.

Contrast

This lets you adjust the contrast. The higher this

is, the stronger the contrast between light and dark

colors.

Saturation

This lets you dene how vivid the colors are. The

higher this value, the more colorful the image;

the lower it is, the more subdued and rened it

becomes.

Color tone

This lets you dene the tone of the colors. Higher

values result in warmer colors, while lower ones

make the colors seem colder.

Monochrome

You can choose from ve color tones in

Monochrome: [ B/W], [ Sepia], [ Blue],

[ Purple] and [ Green]. Set this to [ ] to shoot

in color. If this is set to anything besides [ ],

[Saturation] and [Color tone] are not available.

Other Shooting Modes

Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and take shots enhanced with

unique image effects or captured using special functions

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Saving/Loading Settings

You can save your favorite settings and reload them later for repeated

use.

Saving Settings

●Follow steps 1 and 2 in “Shooting with

Your Favorite Settings (Creative Assist)”

49) to select [ ] and set up your

preferences.

●Press the [ ] button, press the

[ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and

then press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the

[ ][ ] dials to select where to save

your settings.

●You can save up to six sets of settings.

●If you select a previously saved set,

[ Compare] will be displayed. In

this mode, when you press the [ ]

button, the previously saved settings

will be displayed on-screen, letting you

compare them with your new settings.

●Press the [ ] button; a conrmation

screen is displayed. Press the [ ][ ]

buttons or turn the [ ] dial to select [OK],

and then press the [ ] button.

1 Enter [ ] mode.

●Set the mode dial to [ ].

2 Congure the settings.

●Press the [ ] button, and then press

the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the option.

Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

[ ] dials to change options (=

31).

●Once everything is set up, press the

[] button to return to the shooting

screen.

3 Shoot.

●When shooting with ash, [Background] cannot be set.

●Adjust the values of the options with [ ] shown next to them

in the shooting screen by turning the [ ] dial. Press the

[][ ] buttons to move the [ ], and select the option to

adjust.

●Your settings are reset when the power is turned off, but set [Keep

setting] in [ 4] to [Enable] to save your settings even after

turning off the camera.

●Touch [ ] at the upper right of the screen to show settings. You

can also touch options in the settings screen to adjust them.

Touch [ ] to return to the shooting screen.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Playing Back Images

●When displaying images shot in [ ]

mode, press the [ ] button to display

the screen shown to the left, letting you

view the settings used when the picture

was taken.

[ ] Mode and Creative Zone Settings

[ ] mode setting Creative Auto setting

(A) Background (a) Aperture value (=

83)

(B) Brightness

(b) Exposure compensation (=

61)

Flash time is (b’) Flash exposure compensation

76)

65)

(D) Contrast (d) Picture Style contrast (=

68)

(E) Saturation (e) Picture Style saturation (=

68)

(F) Monochrome (f) Picture Style lter and toning effect

68)

●Follow step 1 in “Shooting with Your

Favorite Settings (Creative Assist)”

49) to select [ ].

●Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ]

buttons to choose [ ], and then press

the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ][ ]

dials to select the settings to load.

●Press the [ ] button to apply the saved

settings.

●Select [–] and press the [ ] button to go

back without applying any settings.

Using Screen Settings

You can load settings from images shot in [ ] mode and use them to

shoot your own pictures.

●Follow step 1 in “Shooting with Your

Favorite Settings (Creative Assist)”

49) to choose [ ].

●Press the [ ] button to enter Playback

mode, and then select an image shot in

[ ] for display.

●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the

menu, and press the [ ] button again.

●The settings are applied and the camera

goes into shooting mode.

●A message is displayed if you try to apply settings when the

mode dial is set to anything besides [ ]. The camera does not

return to shooting mode. Turn the mode dial to [ ] to apply the

settings.

●Images shot in anything besides [ ] mode will not be shown in

[] mode.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Shooting Flowers and Small Objects

(Close-up)

Still Images Movies

●Take pictures of owers and other objects

from close up to make them look huge in

your photos.

●To make small things appear even larger,

use a macro lens (sold separately).

●Check the attached lens for its minimum

focusing distance from the subject.

The lens minimum focusing distance is

measured from the [ ] (focal plane)

mark on the top of the camera to the

subject.

Shooting Moving Subjects (Sports)

Still Images Movies

●When using a lens with “STM” in its

name, the camera keeps focusing while

shooting continuously. With other lenses,

focus is locked at the position determined

when you pressed the shutter button

halfway.

Shooting Evening Scenes

without Using a Tripod (Handheld

NightScene)

Still Images Movies

●Beautiful shots of evening scenes or

portraits with evening scenery in the

background, without the need to hold the

camera very still (as with a tripod).

●A single image is created by combining

consecutive shots, reducing camera

shake and image noise.

Specic Scenes

Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will

automatically congure the settings for optimal shots.

1 Enter [ ] mode.

●Set the mode dial to [ ].

2 Choose a shooting mode.

●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the

menu, and then choose a shooting mode

31).

3 Shoot.

Shooting Portraits (Portrait)

Still Images Movies

●Take shots of people with a softening

effect.

Shooting Landscapes (Landscape)

Still Images Movies

●You can shoot wide-open landscapes

with the focus close up or far away,

letting you capture vivid skies and nature

scenes.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Image Effects (Creative Filters)

Add a variety of effects to images when shooting.

1 Enter [ ] mode.

●Set the mode dial to [ ].

2 Choose a shooting mode.

●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the

menu, and then choose a shooting mode

31).

3 Shoot.

●Subjects appear larger in [ ] mode compared to other modes.

●In [ ] and [ ] modes, shots may look grainy because the ISO

speed (=

62) is increased to suit the shooting conditions.

●Because the camera will shoot continuously in [ ] mode, hold it

steady while shooting.

●In [ ] mode, excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions

may prevent you from obtaining the desired results.

●When you use a tripod for evening scenes, shooting in [ ] mode

instead of [ ] mode will give better results (=

35).

Taking Vivid Pictures of Food (Food)

Still Images Movies

Any dish can look like a bright and colorful delight.

1 Choose [ ].

●Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”

51) and choose [ ].

2 Change the color tone.

●Turn the [ ] dial to change color

tones.

3 Shoot.

●This mode may produce unsuitable color tones for human

subjects.

●If you use ash, the Tone setting will switch to standard.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Adding Artistic Effects

●Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects

(Creative Filters)” (=

52) and choose

[ ].

●Turn the [ ] dial to choose an effect

level.

●A preview is shown of how your shot will

look with the effect applied.

Natural Images are natural and organic.

Art Standard Images resemble paintings, with subdued contrast.

Art Vivid Images resemble vivid illustrations.

Art Bold Images resemble oil paintings, with bold edges.

Art Embossed Images resemble old photos, with bold edges and

dark ambiance.

Shooting High-Contrast Scenes (High Dynamic

Range)

Still Images Movies

Three consecutive images are captured at different brightness levels

each time you shoot, and the camera combines image areas with optimal

brightness to create a single image. This mode can reduce the washed-

out highlights and loss of detail in shadows that tend to occur in high-

contrast shots.

1 Choose [ ].

●Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects

(Creative Filters)” (=

52) and choose

[ ].

2 Shoot.

●Hold the camera steady as you shoot.

When you press the shutter button all

the way down, the camera will take three

shots and combine them.

●Excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions may prevent

you from obtaining the desired results.

●If excessive camera shake interferes with shooting, mount

the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still.

Additionally, you should turn off image stabilization when using a

tripod or other means to secure the camera (=

78).

●Any subject movement will make the image blurry.

●There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera

processes and combines the images.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

2 Choose an effect level.

●Turn the [ ] dial to choose an effect

level.

●A preview is shown of how your shot will

look with the effect applied.

3 Shoot.

Shooting Watercolor-like Photos (Water Painting

Effect)

Still Images Movies

You can shoot pictures with a light, soft watercolor-like effect.

1 Choose [ ].

●Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects

(Creative Filters)” (=

52) and choose

[ ].

2 Choose an effect level.

●Turn the [ ] dial to choose an effect

level.

●A preview is shown of how your shot will

look with the effect applied.

3 Shoot.

Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect (Fish-Eye

Effect)

Still Images Movies

Shoot with the distorting effect of a sh-eye lens.

1 Choose [ ].

●Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects

(Creative Filters)” (=

52) and choose

[ ].

2 Choose an effect level.

●Turn the [ ] dial to choose an effect

level.

●A preview is shown of how your shot will

look with the effect applied.

3 Shoot.

●Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the

desired results.

Shooting Oil Painting-like Photos (Art Bold

Effect)

Still Images Movies

Emphasize the three-dimensional shape of the subject for an oil-like

effect.

1 Choose [ ].

●Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects

(Creative Filters)” (=

52) and choose

[ ].

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time (for

One-Minute Clips)

Speed Playback Time

Approx. 12 sec.

Approx. 6 sec.

Approx. 3 sec.

●Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the

desired results.

●To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical, press the [ ][ ]

buttons in step 2. To move the frame, press the [ ][ ] buttons

again. To return the frame to horizontal orientation, press the

[][ ] buttons.

●Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the

frame.

●Movie quality depends on the video format (=

139) and still-

image aspect ratio (=

45).

●If the video system is set to [NTSC], the quality is [ ] for

the [ ] aspect ratio and [ ] for the [ ] aspect ratio.

●If the video system is set to [PAL], the quality is [ ] for the

[] aspect ratio and [ ] for the [ ] aspect ratio.

●You can also move the frame by touching or dragging across the

screen.

Shots Resembling Miniature Models (Miniature

Effect)

Still Images Movies

Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above

and below your selected area.

You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by

choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and

objects in the scene will move quickly during playback. Note that sound is

not recorded.

1 Choose [ ].

●Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects

(Creative Filters)” (=

52) and choose

[ ].

●A white frame is displayed, indicating the

image area that will not be blurred.

2 Choose the area to keep in focus.

●Press the [ ] button.

●Press the [ ] button to resize the

frame, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons

or turn the [ ] dial to move it.

3 For movies, choose the movie

playback speed.

●Turn the [ ] dial to choose the speed.

4 Return to the shooting screen and

shoot.

●Press the [ ] button to return to the

shooting screen, and then shoot.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect

Still Images Movies

This function allows you to shoot images as if a soft focus lter were

attached to the camera. You can adjust the effect level as desired.

1 Choose [ ].

●Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects

(Creative Filters)” (=

52) and choose

[ ].

2 Choose an effect level.

●Turn the [ ] dial to choose an effect

level.

●A preview is shown of how your shot will

look with the effect applied.

3 Shoot.

●Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the

desired results.

Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect (Toy Camera

Effect)

Still Images Movies

This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera by vignetting

(darker, blurred image corners) and changing the overall color.

1 Choose [ ].

●Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects

(Creative Filters)” (=

52) and choose

[ ].

2 Choose a color tone.

●Turn the [ ] dial to choose a color

tone.

●A preview is shown of how your shot will

look with the effect applied.

3 Shoot.

Standard Shots resemble toy camera images.

Warm Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard].

Cool Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard].

●Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the

desired results.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Shooting Movies in Movie Mode

Still Images Movies

1 Enter [ ] mode.

●Set the mode dial to [ ].

●Displays black bars on the top and

bottom edges of the screen. The black

bars indicate image areas not recorded.

●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the

menu, and then choose [ ] (=

31).

2 Congure the settings to suit the

movie (=

177).

3 Shoot.

●Press the movie button.

●To stop movie recording, press the movie

button again.

●If using a lens that supports Dynamic IS (=

78), selecting [ ]

mode adjusts the range displayed on-screen to make the subject

larger.

●Touch the [ ] button before or during shooting to show the

[] icon and use a xed focal position.

●Touch [ ] on the screen before or during shooting to switch

between automatic or xed focus position when shooting. (The

[] on the upper-left corner of the [ ] icon turns green when

using automatic focus position adjustment.) This is not displayed

when [Movie Servo AF] (=

39) is set to [Disable] on the [ 5]

tab in the menu.

Shooting in Monochrome (Grainy B/W)

Still Images Movies

You can take pictures with a rough monochrome feel.

1 Choose [ ].

●Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects

(Creative Filters)” (=

52) and choose

[ ].

2 Choose an effect level.

●Turn the [ ] dial to choose an effect

level.

●A preview is shown of how your shot will

look with the effect applied.

3 Shoot.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

●In the menu (=

32), set [AF w/ shutter button during ] on

the [ 5] tab to [Disable] to turn off focusing when the shutter

button is pressed halfway when shooting movies.

●In [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ]

(16:9 aspect ratio) modes, still photos will be saved in the [ ]

aspect ratio.

●In [ ] and [ ] (4:3 aspect ratio) modes, still photos

will be saved in the [ ] aspect ratio.

Locking or Changing Image Brightness

Still Images Movies

Before or during recording, you can lock the exposure, or change it in 1/3-

stop increments within a range of -3 to +3 stops.

●Press the [ ] button to lock the

exposure. To unlock the exposure, press

the [ ] button again.

●Turn the exposure compensation dial to

adjust the brightness as you watch the

screen.

●You can also lock and unlock the exposure by touching [ ] on

the screen.

●During shooting, touch the exposure compensation bar at the

bottom of the screen and then touch the [ ][ ] buttons to change

the exposure.

●Exposures adjusted by changing the exposure correction with

the touch screen will not feature the same exposure correction

settings as when using the exposure compensation dial. Look at

the screen to verify the exposure.

Shooting Still Images during Movie Recording

Still Images Movies

Shoot still images during movie recording as follows.

1 While shooting a movie, focus on a

subject.

●Press the shutter button halfway down

to readjust the focus and exposure. (The

camera will not beep.)

●Movie recording will continue.

2 Shoot.

●Press the shutter button all the way

down.

●Your shot will be recorded.

●Shooting still images during movie recording may not be possible

when the memory card’s recording speed is slow, or when there is

not enough free internal memory.

●Shutter sounds will be heard in the movie.

●An orange AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot

focus when you press the shutter button halfway. No picture is

taken, even if you press the shutter button all the way down.

●The ash does not re.

●Movie recording may stop if shooting still images lls up the

internal memory.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Turning Off the Wind Filter

Noise caused by strong wind can be reduced. However, the recording

may sound unnatural when this option is used when there is no wind. You

can turn off the wind lter for these situations.

●Follow step 1 in “Adjusting the Recording

Volume” (=

59) to display the [Sound

recording] screen.

●Choose [Wind lter/Attenuator] and press

the [ ] button.

●Choose [Wind Filter] and then [Off].

Using the Attenuator

The attenuator can help reduce sound clipping in loud environments.

However, this reduces the recording volume for scenes shot in quieter

environments.

●Follow step 1 in “Adjusting the Recording

Volume” (=

59) to display the [Sound

recording] screen.

●Choose [Wind lter/Attenuator] and press

the [ ] button.

●Choose [Attenuator], and then choose

[On].

Sound Settings

Still Images Movies

Adjusting the Recording Volume

In [Auto], although the recording level (volume) is adjusted automatically,

you can set the level manually to suit the shooting scene.

1 Access the [Sound recording]

screen.

●Press the [ ] button, choose

[Sound recording] on the [ 5] tab, and

then press the [ ] button (=

32).

2 Congure the settings.

●Select [Sound recording] and press the

[ ] button. In the next screen, press the

[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to

select [Manual] and then press the [ ]

button.

●Press the [ ] button to choose [Rec.

level]. Press the [ ] button. In the next

screen, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn

the [ ] dial to dene the level and then

press the [ ] button.

●To restore the original setting, repeat this

process but choose [Auto].

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Shooting in Program AE

([P] Mode)

Still Images Movies

You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting

style.

1 Enter [ ] mode.

●Set the mode dial to [ ].

2 Customize the settings as desired

61 – =

81), and then shoot.

●Movies can be recorded in [ ] mode as well, by pressing the

movie button. However, some menu (=

31, =

32) settings

may be automatically adjusted for movie recording.

P Mode

More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting style

●Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera with the mode dial set

to [ ] mode.

●[]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure

●Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes other than

[], make sure the function is available in that mode (=

177).

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Image Brightness (Exposure)

Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure

Compensation)

Still Images Movies

The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop

increments, in a range of –3 to +3.

●As you watch the screen, turn the

exposure compensation dial to adjust

brightness.

Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock)

Still Images Movies

Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify focus and

exposure separately.

1 Lock the exposure.

●Aim the camera at the subject to shoot

with the exposure locked, and then press

the [ ] button.

●[] is displayed, and the exposure is

locked.

●Press the [ ] button again to cancel and

remove the [ ] icon.

2 Compose the shot and shoot.

Adjusting Shooting Functions

from a Single Screen

The INFO. Quick Control screen lets you quickly adjust options using a

single screen of functions.

1 Access the INFO. Quick Control

screen.

●Press the [ ] button repeatedly to

display the INFO. Quick Control screen.

2 Select a function to adjust.

●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose

a function and display a description.

●You can also turn the [ ][ ] dials to

access functions.

●The adjustable functions differ depending on the shooting mode.

●Some functions open up another options screen when you

choose them and press the [ ] button. Options labeled with a

[] icon in the second screen can be congured by pressing

the [ ] button. Press the [ ] button to return to the INFO.

Quick Control screen.

●Touch a function in the INFO. Quick Control screen, and then

touch it again to go to the adjustment screen for the function.

Touch [ ] to return to the previous screen.

●Touch [ ] on the upper right of the function description to close

the description display.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

●In [ ] mode, exposure is locked when you press the shutter

button halfway. In [ ] [ ] [ ] modes, the exposure is not

locked when you press the shutter button halfway and is not

determined until the moment you shoot the picture.

●This can also be adjusted by choosing [Metering mode] on the

[3] tab of the menu (=

32).

Changing the ISO Speed

Still Images Movies

●Press the [ ] button, turn the [ ] dial to

choose the ISO speed, and then press

the [ ] button.

●The option you congured is now

displayed.

AUTO

Automatically adjusts

the ISO speed to suit

the shooting mode and

conditions.

100, 125, 160, 200 For shooting outdoors in

fair weather.

250, 320, 400, 500, 640, 800 For shooting in cloudy

conditions, or at twilight.

1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3200,

4000, 5000, 6400, 8000, 10000, 12800

For shooting night

scenes, or in dark rooms.

Shooting sensitivity increases as the ISO speed goes up. The lower the

speed, the lower the sensitivity.

●AE: Auto Exposure

●After the exposure is locked, you can adjust the combination

of shutter speed and aperture value by turning the [ ] dial

(Program Shift).

Changing the Metering Method

Still Images Movies

Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting

conditions as follows.

●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the

menu, and choose the desired option

31).

●The option you congured is now

displayed.

Evaluative

For typical shooting conditions, including backlit

shots. Automatically adjusts standard exposure to

match the shooting conditions.

Partial

metering

Effective when the background is much brighter

than the subject due to backlighting, etc. Metering is

restricted to within the circular frame (Spot AE Point

frame) displayed in the center of the screen.

Spot

For metering a specic spot of the subject or scene.

Metering restricted to within the circular frame (Spot

AE Point frame), displayed in the center of the

screen.

Center

Weighted

Avg.

Determines the average brightness of light across

the entire image area, calculated by treating

brightness in the central area as more important.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting)

Still Images Movies

Three consecutive images are captured at different exposure levels

(standard exposure, underexposure, and then overexposure) each

time you shoot. You can adjust the amount of underexposure and

overexposure (relative to standard exposure) from –2 to +2 stops in 1/3-

stop increments.

1 Access the setting screen.

●Press the [ ] button, choose [AEB]

on the [ 3] tab, and then press the [ ]

button (=

32).

2 Congure the settings.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to adjust values.

●To cancel the AEB function, follow steps

1 – 2 to set the AEB correction value to 0.

●AEB cannot be used when the ash is not set to [ ], Multi Shot

Noise Reduction is on (=

80), or when continuous or bulb

shooting is active.

●If exposure compensation is already in use (=

61), the value

specied for that function is treated as the standard exposure

level for this function. In step 2, you can turn the exposure

compensation dial on the screen to adjust the correction.

●To view the automatically determined ISO speed when you have

set the ISO speed to [AUTO], press the shutter button halfway.

●Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image

graininess, there may be a greater risk of subject and camera

shake in some shooting conditions.

●Choosing a higher ISO speed will increase shutter speed, which

may reduce subject and camera shake and increase the ash

range. However, shots may look grainy.

●This can also be adjusted by going to [ISO speed] on the [ 3]

tab of the menu (=

32) and selecting [ISO speed].

●If you want to select speeds up to [H] (equivalent to ISO 25600),

go to the menu (=

32), choose [C.Fn I:Exposure] from the

[1] tab, and set [ISO expansion] to [1:On] (=

88).

Adjusting ISO Auto Settings

Still Images Movies

You can select the maximum ISO speed used when ISO speed is set to

[AUTO].

1 Access the setting screen.

●Press the [ ] button, choose [ISO

speed] on the [ 3] tab, and then press

the [ ] button (=

32).

2 Congure the settings.

●Choose [ISO Auto] and then choose an

option (=

32).

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Shooting Bright Subjects (Highlight Tone

Priority)

Still Images Movies

The camera can improve gradation on the high-brightness spectrum to

reduce clipped whites on the subject.

●Press the [ ] button, choose

[Highlight tone priority] on the [ 3] tab,

and choose [D+] (=

32).

●Setting this to [D+] makes ISO speeds below 160 unavailable.

The Auto Lighting Optimizer will also be set to [Disable].

Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast

(Auto Lighting Optimizer)

Still Images Movies

If the image comes out dark or the contrast is low, the brightness and

contrast can be corrected automatically.

●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the

menu, and choose the desired option

31).

●Depending on the shooting conditions, noise may increase.

●When the effect of the Auto Lighting Optimizer is too strong and

the image becomes excessively bright, set it to [Low] or [Disable].

●If a setting other than [Disable] is set and you use exposure

compensation or ash exposure compensation to darken the

exposure, the image may still come out bright, or the effect of

AEB-based exposure compensation may be reduced. If you want

a darker exposure, set this function to [Disable].

●The Auto Lighting Optimizer can also be set with the [Auto

Lighting Optimizer] option on the [ 3] tab of the menu

32).

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Custom White Balance

For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white

balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white

balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot.

1 Shoot a white object.

●Fill the LCD monitor screen with a sheet

of white paper, etc.

●Focus manually and shoot (=

74).

2 Select [Custom White Balance].

●On the [ 4] tab, select [Custom White

Balance] and then press the [ ] button.

●The custom white balance selection

screen will appear.

3 Load the white data.

●Select the image that was captured in

step 1 and then press [ ].

●In the conrmation screen, press the

[][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to

choose [OK], and then press the [ ]

button.

●Press the [ ] button to close the

menu.

4 Select [ ].

●Follow the steps in “Adjusting White

Balance” (=

65) to select [ ].

Image Colors

Adjusting White Balance

Still Images Movies

By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more

natural for the scene you are shooting.

●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the

menu, and choose the desired option

31).

●The option you congured is now

displayed.

Auto Automatically sets the optimal white balance for

the shooting conditions.

Day Light For shooting outdoors in fair weather.

Shade For shooting in the shade.

Cloudy For shooting in cloudy weather or at twilight.

Tungsten light Tungsten

White

uorescent

light

For shooting under white uorescent lighting.

Flash For shooting with the ash.

Custom For manually setting a custom white balance.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

2 Congure advanced settings.

●To congure more advanced settings,

press the [ ] button and adjust the

correction level by turning the [ ][ ]

dials.

●To reset the correction level, press the

[] button.

●Press the [ ] button to complete the

setting.

●Once you set a correction value, it will be retained even after

changing the white balance value in step 1.

●B: blue; A: amber; M: magenta; G: green

●One level of blue/amber correction is equivalent to about 5

mireds on a color temperature conversion lter. (Mired: Color

temperature unit representing color temperature conversion lter

density)

●This can also be adjusted by going to the menu (=

32) and

choosing [WB Correction] on the [ 4] tab.

●You can also choose the correction level by touching or dragging

the bar in step 1 or the frame in step 2.

●You can also access the screen in step 2 by touching [ ] in

step 1.

●If the exposure obtained in step 1 is too bright or dark, a correct

white balance may not be obtained.

●A message will appear if you use an image in step 3 that is not

suitable for loading white data. Choose [Cancel] to select another

image. Choose [OK], and the chosen image will be used to

load white data, although this may not produce a suitable white

balance.

●If you see an [Unselectable image.] message in step 3, select

[OK] to close the message and select another image.

●If you see a [Set WB to “ ”] message in step 3, press the [ ]

button to return to the menu screen and then select [ ].

●Instead of a white object, a gray chart or 18% gray reector

(commercially available) can produce a more accurate white

balance.

●The current white balance settings do not matter at the time you

shoot the image in step 1.

Manually Correcting White Balance

Still Images Movies

You can manually correct white balance. This adjustment can match the

effect of using a commercially available color temperature conversion lter

or color-compensating lter.

1 Congure the setting.

●Follow the steps in “Adjusting White

Balance” (=

65) to choose the white

balance option.

●Turn the [ ] dial to adjust the

correction level for B and A.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

User Dene

You can add a basic style such as [Portrait] or

[Landscape], a Picture Style le, etc., and adjust

it as desired (=

67).

●If no Picture Style is added to [ ], [ ] or [ ], these

settings will be the same as the [Auto] default settings.

●This can also be adjusted by going to the menu (=

32) and

choosing [Picture Style] on the [ 4] tab.

Using Your Favorite Shades (Picture Style)

Still Images Movies

Picture Styles allow you to use your preferred color hues in dened picture

and subject conditions. There are 6 types of Picture Styles available and

all are fully adjustable.

●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in

the menu, and choose the desired option

31).

Auto

The color tone will be adjusted automatically

to suit the scene. The colors will look vivid,

especially for blue skies, greenery, and sunsets

in nature, outdoor, and sunset scenes.

Standard The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. Suitable

for most scenes.

Portrait

For smooth skin tones. The image looks softer.

Suited for close-up portraits. Change the [Color

tone] to adjust skin tones (=

68).

Landscape

For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp

and crisp images. Effective for impressive

landscapes.

Neutral For images to be processed by computer later.

Natural color tones and a subdued look.

Faithful

For images to be processed by computer later.

When the subject is captured under a color

temperature of 5200K, the color is adjusted

colorimetrically to match the subject’s color.

Vivid colors are suppressed for a subdued look.

Monochrome Creates black-and-white images.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

1 Access the setting screen.

●Follow the steps in “Using Your Favorite

Shades (Picture Styles)” (=

67) to

select the Picture Style you want.

●Press the [ ] button.

2 Congure the settings.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an

item; then, press the [ ][ ] buttons or

turn the [ ][ ] dials to choose an

option.

●Press the [ ] button to undo any

changes.

●When nished, press the [ ] button.

●Increasing the [Contrast] will make the [Filter effect] more

pronounced.

Adjusting Picture Styles

The following settings can be adjusted for each Picture Style.

Sharpness

Adjusts the sharpness of the subject. Lower

values produce softer (more blurred) effects;

higher values produce sharper results.

Contrast

Adjusts the contrast. Lower values produce

weaker contrast; higher values produce

stronger contrast.

Saturation*1

Adjusts the color saturation in the image.

Lower values produce shallower colors;

higher values produce deeper colors.

Color tone*1

Adjusts skin color tone. Lower values

produce redder hues; higher values produce

colors that are more yellow.

Filter effect*2

Emphasizes white clouds in monochrome

images, or the greens of trees.

N: Normal black-and-white image with no

lter effects.

Ye: The blue sky will look more natural, and

the white clouds will look crisper.

Or: The blue sky will look slightly darker.

Sunsets will look more brilliant.

R: The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall

leaves will look crisper and brighter.

G: Skin tones and lips will appear muted.

Green tree leaves will look crisper and

brighter.

Toning effect*2

The following monochrome colors can be

selected: [N:None], [S:Sepia], [B:Blue],

[P:Purple] or [G:Green].

*1 Not available in [ ] mode.

*2 Only available in [ ] mode.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Shooting Range and Focusing

Selecting the AF Method

Still Images Movies

You can change the AF (autofocus) method to use as necessary for your

scene and subject.

●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in

the menu, and then choose the desired

option (=

32).

●When the subject is dark or has no contrast, in extremely bright

conditions, or with some EF and EF-S lenses, it may take longer

to achieve focus, or correct focus may not be achieved. For more

information about lenses, refer to the Canon website.

●This can also be adjusted by going to the menu (=

32) and

choosing [AF method] on the [ 2] tab.

1-Point AF

●Focus using a single frame. Effective for reliable focusing.

●Press the shutter button halfway down. Once the scene is in focus, the

frame will turn green.

Saving Customized Picture Styles

Basic styles like [ ] and [ ] can be adjusted to your liking and

saved for later. You can save multiple Picture Styles with different settings

for parameters such as sharpness and contrast.

1 Select a Picture Style to save.

●Follow the steps in “Using Your Favorite

Shades (Picture Styles)” (=

67) to

select [ ], [ ] or [ ].

2 Select the base Picture Style.

●Press the [ ] button.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the

[ ][ ] dials to select the Picture Style

that will serve as a base.

3 Adjust the style.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons to select the

item to adjust; then, press the [ ][ ]

buttons or turn the [ ][ ] dials to

adjust the item.

●When nished, press the [ ] button.

●In step 2, you can also select styles added to the camera using

the EOS Utility software (=

158).

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

●The maximum number of frames displayed depends on the

chosen aspect ratio (=

45).

- [] [ ] [ ]: 49 frames

- []: 35 frames

●You can change the frame’s position (=

71). To compose shots

so that subjects are positioned at the edge or in a corner without

changing the frame position, rst aim the camera to capture

the subject in an AF frame, and then hold the shutter button

halfway down. As you continue to hold the shutter button halfway,

recompose the shot as desired, and then press the shutter button

all the way down (Focus Lock).

●Follow steps 2 – 4 in “Shooting in Manual Focus Mode” (=

74)

to magnify the position of the AF frame. The touch shutter does

not work while using this operation.

+Tracking

●After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed

around the face of the person determined by the camera to be the

main subject. You can also choose the subject yourself (=

71).

●When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving

subjects, within a certain range.

●Press the shutter button halfway down. The frame will turn green when

focused.

●If no face is found, after you press the shutter button halfway, a green

frame is displayed around the area in focus.

●Examples of faces that cannot be detected:

- Subjects that are distant or extremely close

- Subjects that are dark or light

- Faces in prole, at an angle, or partly hidden

●The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces.

●An orange AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot

focus when you press the shutter button halfway.

●Gray frames are displayed over faces detected at the edge of the

screen. These cannot be focused upon by pressing the shutter

button halfway.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

●You can press the [ ] button to select people’s faces or move

the AF frame.

- When the AF frame mode is set to [ ], after pressing

the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to move the

frame, and then press the [ ] button to return to the shooting

screen. Hold down the [ ] button for at least two seconds

to reset the frame to the center of the shooting or frame-

adjustment screen.

- When the AF frame mode is set to [ ], after pressing

the [ ] button, [Face Select: On] will be displayed and [ ]

will be shown over the face determined to be the main subject.

To switch the face frame [ ] to another detected face, keep

pressing the [ ] button. Once you go through all available

faces, [Face Select: Off] will be displayed and the frame will

disappear.

Shooting with the AF Lock

Still Images Movies

The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal position will

not change even when you release your nger from the shutter button.

1 Lock the focus.

●With the shutter button pressed halfway,

press the [ ] button.

●The focus is now locked, and [ ] is

displayed.

●To unlock the focus, release the shutter

button and press the [ ] button again. In

this case, [ ] is no longer displayed.

2 Compose the shot and shoot.

Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF)

Still Images Movies

You can shoot after the camera focuses on your selected subject,

person’s face, or location shown on the screen.

1 Choose a subject, a person’s face,

or a location to focus on.

●Touch the subject or person on the

screen.

●When the AF frame mode is set to

[ ], an AF frame is displayed where

you touched.

●When the AF frame mode is set to

[ ], [ ] will be displayed once

the subject is recognized (autofocus will

continue even if the subject moves). To

cancel Touch AF, touch [ ].

2 Shoot.

●Press the shutter button halfway. After

the camera focuses, a green [ ] will be

displayed.

●Press the shutter button all the way down

to shoot.

●If you prefer the camera not to shoot when you touch the screen,

make sure [Touch Shutter] mode is deactivated. Go to the menu

32), set [Touch Shutter] on the [ 1] tab, and then choose

[Disable].

●Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or

move too rapidly, or when there is inadequate contrast between

subjects and the background.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

●Once set to [SERVO AF], the camera focuses on the frame in the

center of the screen if it cannot detect a face when the shutter

button is pressed halfway down, even if [ +Tracking] is activated

70).

●When servo AF is on, the exposure is not locked when you press

the shutter button halfway and is not determined until the moment

you shoot the picture, regardless of your current metering mode

62) settings.

●If you attach a lens with “STM” in the name, turn on servo AF

for continual shooting (=

42) with constant focus adjustment.

Using this feature will reduce the continual shooting speed. If you

operate the zoom during continuous shooting, the focus may be

lost.

●With other lenses, the focus will be locked for the second and

subsequent frames during continuous shooting, resulting in

slower continuous shooting.

●Depending on the lens used, the distance to the subject and the

subject’s speed, the camera may not be able to achieve correct

focus.

●This can also be adjusted by going to the menu (=

32) and

choosing [AF operation] on the [ 2] tab.

Shooting with Servo AF

Still Images Movies

This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the

camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long

as you press the shutter button halfway.

1 Congure the setting.

●Press the [ ] button, choose [ONE

SHOT], and then choose [SERVO] on the

menu (=

32).

2 Focus.

●Press the shutter button halfway to focus.

A green AF frame will be displayed.

●Once the picture composition changes

or the subject moves, the AF frame turns

blue and adjusts the focus. When focus

is achieved, the AF frame will go back to

green.

●The camera may not be able to shoot a picture while focusing,

even if you press the shutter button all the way down. Continue to

hold down the shutter button while following your subject.

●If focus is not achieved, the AF frame will turn orange.

●AF lock shooting is not available.

●If you set the self-timer (=

40) to anything besides [ ], it is set

to [ONE SHOT].

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Fine-tuning Focus

Still Images Movies

If an EF-M lens is attached, you can use the lens’s focus ring to ne-tune

the focus after autofocus is complete.

1 Congure the settings.

●Press the [ ] button, choose

[AF+MF] on the [ 2] tab, and then

choose [On] (=

32).

2 Focus.

●Press the shutter button halfway to

autofocus and keep it halfway pressed.

3 Fine-tune the focus.

●Turn the lens focus ring to adjust the

focus.

●[MF] will ash in the display.

●Remove your nger from the shutter

button to cancel.

4 Shoot.

●Press the shutter button all the way down

to shoot.

●This cannot be used with servo AF (=

72).

●This feature is not available when a non-EF-M lens is attached.

Changing the Focus Setting

Still Images Movies

You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on

subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed.

Instead, you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the

shutter button halfway.

●Press the [ ] button, choose

[Continuous AF] on the [ 2] tab, and

then choose [On] (=

32).

Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because

the camera constantly focuses on subjects until you press

the shutter button halfway.

Off

Conserves battery power, because the camera does not

focus constantly. However, it may take longer than usual to

focus on the subject.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

5 Focus.

●While looking at the magnied display,

turn the lens focusing ring to focus.

6 Shoot.

●If [Continuous AF] is set to [Off], you do not need to turn off the

camera when switching to [MF] when using a non-EF-M lens.

●You can drag the frame in step 3 to move the magnied display.

●You can also touch the [ ] on the bottom right to change the

magnication level or drag the screen to change the magnied

display position.

Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking)

Still Images Movies

Edges of subjects in focus are displayed in color to make manual focusing

easier. You can adjust the colors and the sensitivity (level) of edge

detection as needed.

1 Access the setting screen.

●Press the [ ] button, choose [MF

Peaking Settings] on the [ 2] tab, and

then set [Peaking] to [On] (=

32).

2 Congure the setting.

●Choose a menu item to congure, and

then choose the desired option (=

32).

●Colors displayed for MF peaking are not recorded in your shots.

Shooting in Manual Focus Mode

Still Images Movies

When focusing is not possible in AF mode, use manual focus. Magnifying

the screen display will make it easier to focus.

1 Choose [ ].

●Press the [ ] button if you have an EF-M

lens attached.

●If you have a non-EF-M lens, turn off the

camera, set the lens switch to [MF], and

then turn the camera back on.

●[MF] is displayed.

2 Display the magnifying frame.

●Press the [ ] button.

●The magnifying frame will appear in the

center of the screen. On the bottom right,

you will see a magnication ratio and the

area currently being magnied.

3 Select the area to magnify.

●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to move

the frame and select the area to magnify.

●Hold down the [ ] button for at least two

seconds to reset the frame to the center

of the screen.

4 Use the magnied display.

●Press the [ ] button or turn the

[ ][ ] dials to switch the overall

magnication between 1x (no

magnication), 5x, or 10x.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Auto

Fires automatically in low-light conditions.

Fires for each shot.

Slow Synchro

Fires to illuminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at a

slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out of ash range.

●In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other

measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,

you should turn off image stabilization when using a tripod or

other means to secure the camera (=

78).

●In [ ] mode, even after the ash res, ensure that the main

subject does not move until the shutter sound is nished playing.

Off

For shooting without the ash.

Flash

Changing the Flash Mode

Still Images Movies

You can change the ash mode to match the shooting scene. For details

on the ash range, see “Internal Flash Range Guide” (=

196).

1 Raise the ash.

●Move the [ ] switch.

2 Congure the setting.

●Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ]

buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose

a ash mode, and then press the [ ]

button.

●The option you congured is now

displayed.

●The setting screen cannot be accessed by pressing the [ ] button

when the ash is lowered. Move the [ ] switch to raise the ash

and then congure the setting.

●If the ash res, vignetting may occur. If the ash res, vignetting

may occur depending on the lens being used.

●When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically

adjusts the shutter speed or ISO speed during the ash shots

to reduce washed-out highlights and shoot at optimal exposure.

For this reason, when shooting with the ash, the shutter speed

or ISO speed displayed when you pressed the shutter button

halfway, may not match the actual shoot setting.

●This can also be congured by going to the menu (=

32),

choosing the [ 3] tab, and selecting [Flash ring] in the [Flash

Control] option.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Shooting with the FE Lock

Still Images Movies

Just as with the AE lock (=

61), you can lock the exposure for ash

shots.

1 Raise the ash and set it to [ ]

75).

2 Lock the ash exposure.

●Aim the camera at the subject to shoot

with the exposure locked, and then press

the [ ] button.

●The ash res, and when

[] is displayed, the ash output level is

retained.

●Press the [ ] button again to cancel and

remove the [ ] icon.

3 Compose the shot and shoot.

●FE: Flash Exposure

●While in FE lock, a circle in the center of the screen shows the

current metering range.

●If standard exposure is not achieved even after the ash res in

step 2, [ ] ashes. Follow step 2 while the subject is within ash

range.

Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation

Still Images Movies

Just as with regular exposure compensation (=

61), you can adjust the

ash exposure from –2 to +2 stops, in 1/3-stop increments.

●Raise the ash, press the [ ] button and

immediately turn the [ ] dial to choose

the compensation level, and then press

the [ ] button.

●The correction level you specied is now

displayed.

●You can congure the ash exposure compensation by accessing

MENU (=

32) and choosing [ 3] tab > [Flash Control] >

[Built-in ash settings] > [ exp. comp.].

●You can also access the [Flash Control] screen (=

32) as

follows.

- Press and hold the [ ] button for at least one second.

- When the ash is up, press the [ ] button and immediately

press the [ ] button.

●You can also access the [Flash Control] screen (=

32) by

pressing the [ ] button and touching [ ].

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Resetting Flash Settings

Still Images Movies

You can reset the [Built-in ash settings] to their defaults.

●Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash

Control] on the [ 3] tab, and select

[Clear settings].

●Choose [Clear built-in ash set.] and

press the [ ] button. On the next screen,

press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [OK], and then press the

[ ] button.

Changing the Flash Timing

Still Images Movies

Change the timing of the ash and shutter release as follows.

●Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash

Control] on the [ 3] tab, and select

[Built-in ash settings].

●Choose [Shutter Sync.], and then choose

the desired option (=

32).

1st curtain The ash res immediately after the shutter opens.

2nd curtain The ash res immediately before the shutter

closes.

●If the shutter speed is set to 1/100 or faster, the ash res on [1st

curtain], even if [2nd curtain] is selected.

Changing the Flash Metering Mode

Still Images Movies

When shooting with the ash, [Evaluative] is used for a standard ash

exposure. This metering method can be changed to average ash

metering mode across the overall ash region, such as when using an

externally metered ash.

●Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash

Control] on the [ 3] tab, select [E-TTL II

meter.], and then select [Average].

●When using [Average], adjust your ash metering compensation

for the scene to be shot.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

●Lenses with built-in image stabilization have “IS” in their names.

IS stands for Image Stabilizer.

Shooting Movies with Subjects at the Same Size

Shown before Shooting

Still Images Movies

Normally, once movie recording begins, the image display area changes

and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of signicant camera

shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before shooting, you can

choose not to reduce signicant camera shake.

●Follow the steps in “Changing the IS

Mode Settings” (=

78) to access the

[IS Settings] screen.

●Choose [Dynamic IS], and then choose

[2] (=

32).

●[Dynamic IS] is displayed only when using a lens that supports

dynamic image stabilization.

●You can also set [IS Mode] to [Off], so that subjects are recorded

at the same size shown before shooting.

Other Settings

Changing the IS Mode Settings

Still Images Movies

If you have an EF-M lens with an image stabilization function, image

stabilization can be adjusted in the menu.

1 Access the setting screen.

●Press the [ ] button, choose [IS

Settings] on the [ 2] tab, and then press

the [ ] button (=

32).

2 Congure the setting.

●Choose [IS Mode], and then choose the

desired option (=

32).

If using a lens with built-in image stabilization, the

camera compensates for camera movement and

hand shaking to stabilize the image when shooting.

Off Deactivates image stabilization.

●If image stabilization cannot prevent camera shake, mount the

camera on a tripod or take other measures to hold it still. In this

case, set [IS Mode] to [Off].

●[IS Mode] is not displayed when a non-EF-M lens is attached. Use

the image stabilization switch on the lens instead (=

22).

●Do not use image stabilization for bulb exposures. Doing so may

lead to incorrect image stabilization behavior.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

●Peripheral illumination correction and chromatic aberration

correction cannot be applied to JPEG images already taken.

●When using a non-Canon lens, setting the corrections to [Disable]

is recommended, even if [Correction data available] is displayed.

●RAW images can be corrected with the Digital Photo Professional

software (=

158).

●Setting [Peripheral illumin.] to [Enable] may cause noise in the

image periphery, depending on shooting conditions.

●The effects of chromatic aberration correction cannot be

viewed on RAW images with the camera. Use the Digital Photo

Professional software (=

158) to view the correction instead.

●Your settings will be retained even after changing lenses, but no

correction will take place if no correction data has been added for

the new lens. If [Correction data not available] is displayed in step

2, use the EOS Utility software (=

158) to add lens correction

data to the camera.

●If the effect of the correction is not visible, magnify the image and

check it again.

●The corrections are also applied when an Extender or Life-size

Converter is attached.

●If the lens does not have distance information, the correction

amount will be lower.

●The correction amount applied with [Peripheral illumin.] will be

slightly lower than the maximum correction amount that can be

set with the Digital Photo Professional software.

●The higher the ISO speed, the lower the peripheral illumination

correction value will be.

Lens Peripheral Illumination/Chromatic

Aberration Correction

Still Images Movies

The unique properties of a lens may cause vignetting or color bleeding

around the contours of the subject. These phenomena can be corrected.

The camera comes with around 35 lenses worth of peripheral illumination/

chromatic aberration correction data. Use the EOS Utility software to view

the lens settings available; if your camera has no data for your lens, you

can add it to the camera. For details, refer to the EOS Utility instruction

manual (=

158).

* There is no need to add data for EF-M lenses.

1 Select [Lens aberration correction].

●Press the [ ] button and choose

[Lens aberration correction] on the [ 2]

tab, and choose the option (=

32).

2 Check if correction data is available.

●Conrm that [Correction data available] is

displayed for the attached lens.

3 Select the desired setting.

●Select the desired option and press the

[ ] button to set (=

31).

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

●Unexpected results may occur if there is signicant misalignment

in the image due to camera shake. Securing the camera with a

tripod or other means is recommended.

●If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave

afterimages or the surrounding area of the subject may become

dark.

●Depending on shooting conditions, noise may appear on the

image periphery.

●This cannot be used with AEB, [Long exp. noise reduction], during

RAW image shooting, or bulb shooting. If any of these is already

in use, [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] will not be available.

●Flash shooting is not possible.

●Recording the image to the card will take longer than with normal

shooting. You cannot take another picture until processing is

completed.

Changing the Noise Reduction Level

Still Images Movies

You can choose from 3 levels of noise reduction: [Standard], [High], [Low].

This is particularly effective when shooting at high ISO speeds.

●Press the [ ] button, choose [High

ISO speed NR] on the [ 4] tab, and

then choose the desired option (=

32).

Using Multi Shot Noise Reduction

The camera can automatically shoot four pictures in a single shot and

combine the images to provide high-quality noise reduction, better than

the [High] selection for [High ISO speed NR].

1 Choose [ ].

●Follow the steps in “Changing Noise

Reduction Level” to select [ ].

2 Shoot.

●Press the shutter button all the way

down. The camera will take four pictures

and combine them, so keep your hands

steady while shooting.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Reducing Noise at Slow Shutter Speeds

Still Images Movies

The camera can reduce the noise that occurs during long exposures at

shutter speeds of 1 second or slower.

●Press the [ ] button, choose [Long

exp. noise reduction] on the [ 4] tab,

and then choose the desired option

32).

OFF (Disable)

Do not perform noise reduction during long exposures.

AUTO (Auto)

Perform noise reduction when noise is detected that is

specic to long exposures at shutter speeds of 1 second

or slower.

ON (Enable) Always perform noise reduction at shutter speeds of 1

second or slower.

●There may be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera

processes images to reduce noise.

●Shooting pictures at a speed of ISO1600 or higher with this option

set to [ON] may result in grainier images than setting the option to

[OFF] or [AUTO].

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Specic Shutter Speeds ([Tv]

Mode)

Still Images Movies

Set your preferred shutter speed before shooting as follows. The camera

automatically adjusts the aperture value to suit your shutter speed.

For details on available shutter speeds, see “Shutter” (=

192).

1 Enter [ ] mode.

●Set the mode dial to [ ].

2 Set the shutter speed.

●Turn the [ ] dial to set the shutter

speed.

●If [Long exp. noise reduction] is set to [ON] or [AUTO] and

shooting is performed with a shutter speed of 1 second or slower,

there may be a delay before taking the next picture due to post-

shot noise reduction processing.

●When shooting at slow shutter speeds on a tripod, you should

turn off image stabilization (=

78).

●Maximum shutter speed with the ash is 1/200 second. If you

specify a faster speed, the camera will automatically reset the

speed to 1/200 second before shooting.

●Orange display of aperture values when you press the shutter

button halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard

exposure. Adjust the shutter speed until the aperture value is

displayed in white, or use safety shift (=

88).

●[]: Time value

Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Take smarter, more sophisticated shots, and customize the camera for

your shooting style

●Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera as set to the respective

mode.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Depth-of-Field Preview

The aperture is open when not shooting with the camera. Its size changes

only at the instant a picture is taken. As a result, the depth of eld may

look narrower (shallower) when viewed in the monitor. Add [ ] (Depth-of-

eld preview) to the buttons (=

89) and press the assigned button to

preview the depth of eld.

Specic Aperture Values ([Av]

Mode)

Still Images Movies

Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera

automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value.

Aperture values allowed differ depending on the lens.

1 Enter [ ] mode.

●Set the mode dial to [ ].

2 Set the aperture value.

●Turn the [ ] dial to set the aperture

value.

●Orange display of shutter speeds when you press the shutter

button halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard

exposure. Adjust the aperture value until the shutter speed is

displayed in white, or use safety shift (=

88).

●Maximum shutter speed with the ash is 1/200 sec. When

shooting with the ash, the camera may automatically change the

dened aperture value to ensure the shutter speed is not faster

than 1/200 sec.

●[ ]: Aperture value (size of the opening made by the

diaphragm in the lens)

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

●After you set the shutter speed and aperture value, the exposure

level may change if you adjust the zoom or recompose the shot.

●When the ISO speed is locked, screen brightness may change

depending on your specied shutter speed or aperture value.

However, screen brightness remains the same when the ash is

up and the mode is set to [ ].

●If ISO speed is set to [AUTO], the ISO speed setting changes to

suit the shutter speed and aperture in order to obtain a standard

exposure. As a result, you may not obtain the desired exposure

effect.

●The Auto Lighting Optimizer (=

64) may change the image

brightness. Press the [ ] button in the Auto Lighting

Optimizer settings screen and add a [ ] to the [Disable during

man expo] option to keep the Auto Lighting Optimizer in [ ]

mode xed to [Disable].

●[ ]: Manual

●Calculation of standard exposure is based on the specied

metering method (=

62).

●You can customize camera operation so that turning the [ ] dial

adjusts the shutter speed and turning the [ ] dial adjusts the

aperture value (=

89).

●The following actions are available when the ISO speed is set to

[AUTO].

- Use the exposure compensation dial to adjust the exposure.

- Press the [ ] button to lock the ISO speed and adjust the

screen brightness.

Specic Shutter Speeds and

Aperture Values ([M] Mode)

Still Images Movies

Follow these steps before shooting to set your preferred shutter speed

and aperture value to obtain the desired exposure.

For details on available shutter speeds, see “Shutter” (=

192). Aperture

values allowed will differ depending on the lens.

1 Enter [ ] mode.

●Set the mode dial to [ ].

2 Congure the setting.

●Turn the [ ] dial to set the shutter

speed (1).

●Press the [ ] button to choose aperture

value (2) or ISO speed (3), and turn the

[ ] dial to specify a value.

●If the ISO speed is locked, an exposure

level mark (5) based on your specied

value is shown on the exposure level

indicator for comparison to the standard

exposure level (4). If deviation from the

standard exposure level exceeds two

stops, the exposure level indicator turns

into a [ ] or [ ].

●If ISO speed is set to [AUTO], pressing

the shutter button halfway will lock the

ISO speed and change the screen

brightness. If standard exposure cannot

be obtained with the dened shutter

speed and aperture value, the ISO speed

is displayed in orange.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Adjusting the Flash Output

Still Images Movies

Choose from the three ash levels in [ ], [ ] and [ ] modes.

1 Set the ash mode to [Manual ash].

●Press the [ ] button and select

[Flash Control] on the [ 3] tab. Choose

[Built-in ash settings] and set the [Flash

Mode] to [Manual ash] (=

32).

2 Congure the settings.

●Raise the ash, press the [ ] button and

immediately turn the [ ] dial to choose

the ash level, and then press the [ ]

button.

●Once the setting is complete, the ash

output level is displayed.

[]: Minimum, [ ]: Medium, [ ]:

Maximum

●Flash levels can also be congured by going to the menu

32), choosing the [ 3] tab, selecting [Built-in ash

settings] in the [Flash Control] option, and choosing [ ash

output].

●You can also access the [Flash Control] screen (=

32) as

follows.

-Press and hold the [ ] button for at least one second.

-When the ash is up, press the [ ] button and immediately

press the [ ] button.

●You can also access the [Flash Control] screen (=

32) by

pressing the [ ] button and touching [ ].

Long (Bulb) Exposures

A bulb exposure keeps the shutter open for as long as you hold down the

shutter button.

1 Activate bulb shooting.

●Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Shutter

Speeds and Aperture Values ([M] Mode)”

84) and set the shutter speed to

[BULB].

2 Shoot.

●The exposure lasts as long as the shutter

button is pressed. The elapsed exposure

time will be displayed on the LCD monitor

during exposure.

●Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it

still and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should turn off

image stabilization when using a tripod or other means to secure

the camera (=

78).

●Since bulb exposures produce more noise than usual, the image

may look grainy. There is a way to reduce noise in long exposures

when [Long exp. noise reduction] is set to [AUTO] or [ON]

80).

●You can also use a Remote Controller (sold separately) for bulb

exposures (=

152).

●If the [Touch Shutter] is set to [Enable], touching the screen will

begin the exposure. Touch the screen again to end the exposure.

Be careful not to shake the camera when tapping the screen.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

●If the ISO speed is locked, an exposure level mark based on

your specied value is shown on the exposure level indicator for

comparison to the standard exposure level. If deviation from the

standard exposure level exceeds two stops, the exposure level

indicator turns into a [ ] or [ ].

●If the ISO speed is set to [AUTO], you can press the shutter

button halfway to view the current ISO speed. If standard

exposure cannot be obtained with the dened shutter speed

and aperture value, the exposure level mark moves to show the

deviation. The exposure level mark turns into a [ ] or [ ] when

deviation from the standard exposure level exceeds two stops.

●The ISO speed allowed will differ depending on the image quality.

ISO 100 – ISO 3200 with [ ], [ ] or [ ],

ISO 100 –ISO 6400 with [ ], [ ], [ ] or

[].

●Touch an option on the bottom of the screen and then touch

[][ ] to adjust its settings.

●Touch [ ] to lock the focus position. [ ] will be shown on the

screen.

Specic Shutter Speeds and

Aperture Values

Still Images Movies

Follow these steps to set your preferred shutter speed, aperture value

and ISO speed. For details on available shutter speeds, see “Shutter”

192). Aperture values allowed differ depending on the lens.

1 Enter [ ] mode.

●Set the mode dial to [ ].

●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the

menu, and then choose [ ] (=

31).

2 Congure the settings.

●Turn the [ ] dial to set the shutter

speed.

●To set the aperture value and ISO speed,

press [ ], choose the desired option, and

then turn the [ ] dial to adjust the setting.

●You may see image icker while shooting under uorescent or

LED lighting, depending on the shutter speed.

●With a large aperture value, it may take longer to achieve focus,

or correct focus may not be achieved.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Customizing Displayed Data

●Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Customizing

Display Information” (=

87) to select

[Custom display 1] or [Custom display 2]

and then press the [ ] button.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose the information to display

and then press the [ ] button to add a

[ ].

●Press the [ ] button to return to the

[Display switching] screen and check the

resulting display.

●Go to [Shooting information display] on the [ 1] tab and choose

[Grid display] to change to a ner grid.

●Go to [Shooting information display] on the [ 1] tab and choose

[Histogram] to change the displayed histogram from a brightness

histogram to an RGB histogram.

Customizing Controls and

Display

Customizing Display Information

You can dene which screens are shown when the [ ] button

is pressed in the shooting screen. You can also customize the data

displayed by the screens.

1 Access the setting screen.

●Choose the [ 1] tab, select [Shooting

information display], and then choose

[Display switching] and press the [ ]

button (=

31).

2 Congure the settings.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose the screens you do not

want displayed and then press the [ ]

button to remove the [ ]. Press the [ ]

button again to add a [ ].

●To return to the menu screen, press the

[] button.

●Use the display sample on the left side of the screen to see what

your selected effect in step 2 will look like.

●You cannot remove all [ ] or add a [ ] only to [INFO. Quick

Control].

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Function

type Function Description

Exposure

ISO expansion

When set to [1:On], ISO speed

[H] is available for selection. In

ISO 25600-equivalent [ ] mode,

[H] is equivalent to ISO 6400

([ ], [ ] or [ ])

or ISO 12800 ([ ], [ ]

[ ] or [ ]).

Safety shift

When set to [1:On], if standard

exposure cannot be obtained with

the dened shutter speed and

aperture value in [ ] or [ ]

mode, the camera automatically

changes the shutter speed and

aperture value in order to get

closer to the standard exposure.

Autofocus AF-assist beam

(LED) ring

When set to [1:Disable], the AF-

assist beam will not re.

Others

Custom Controls

Add frequently used functions

to the front dial, control dial, and

buttons (=

89).

Release shutter

w/o lens

When set to [1:Enable], you can

press the shutter button all the

way or press the movie button to

record images, even if there is no

lens attached to the camera.

Retract lens on

power off

Dene whether to automatically

retract the lens when the camera

is turned off.

Setting Up Advanced Camera Functions

The [ 1] tab of the menu (=

32) lets you customize various camera

functions to suit your picture-taking preferences. Frequently used

functions can also be added to the front dial, control dial, and buttons.

1 Select a function type.

●Press the [ ] button and choose

the [ 1] tab (=

32).

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the

[ ] dial to choose the function type

(Exposure, AF, Other), and then press the

[ ] button.

2 Select the desired function.

●If you selected Exposure or Others, press

the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ][ ]

dials to select a function and then press

the [ ] button.

3 Choose an option.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose an option.

●Press the [ ] button to return to the

menu screen.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

●If adding a function to the [ ] button,

[ ] ([ ] button), or movie button, press

the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the

[ ][ ] dials to select the function.

●Press the [ ] button to return to the

previous menu screen.

Shutter button / [ ]

button

Set to [AE/AF, no AE lock], and you can

press the [ ] button to focus. In this case,

AE lock is not applied when the [ ] button is

pressed. Using the touch shutter, the camera

takes a picture without focusing.

[] / [ ] dials

Set to [Av/Tv], and you can use the [ ]

dial to adjust the aperture value and the [ ]

dial to adjust the shutter speed in [ ] mode.

[] button Pressing the button will trigger the assigned

action.

[] ([ ] button)

Movie button

●Choose [Clear All Custom Func. (C.Fn)] in step 1 and press the

[] button to remove all the changed functions on the [ 1] tab

and restore it to default.

●Even with [ISO expansion] set to [1:On], [H] cannot be selected if

[Highlight tone priority] is set to [D+] (=

64).

●Safety shift is disabled when the ash res.

●The AF-assist beam is light from the lamp (front) that turns on

when the shutter button is pressed halfway in dark areas to help

with focusing.

●[Retract lens on power off] is supported by the following lens.

- EF 40mm f/2.8 STM

- EF-S 24mm f/2.8 STM

Adding Functions to Buttons and Dials

You can change the function of the shutter / [ ] button or [ ] / [ ]

dial, as well as add frequently used functions to the [ ], [ ] ([ ]), and

movie buttons.

1 Access the function assignment

screen.

●Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Setting Up

Advanced Camera Functions” (=

88)

and choose [Custom Controls] from

[Other].

2 Assign functions to controls.

●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn

the [ ][ ] dials to select the dial or

button to assign a function to, and then

press the [ ] button.

●If changing the function of the shutter /

[] button or [ ] / [ ] dial, press the

[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to

select the function.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Saving Shooting Settings ([C] Mode)

Still Images Movies

Save commonly used shooting modes and your congured function

settings for reuse. To access saved settings later, simply turn the mode

dial to [ ]. Even settings that are usually cleared when you switch

shooting modes or turn the camera off (such as self-timer settings) can be

retained this way.

Settings that can be saved

●Shooting modes ([ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ])

●Items set in [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] modes (=

61 – =

84)

●Shooting menu settings

●My Menu settings (=

91)

1 Enter a shooting mode with settings

you want to save, and change the

settings as desired.

2 Access the Register Settings

screen.

●Press the [ ] button, choose

[Custom shooting mode (C)] on the [ 4]

tab, and then press the [ ] button.

3 Register.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [Register settings], and

then press the [ ] button.

●A conrmation screen will appear. Press

the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial

to select [OK], and then press the [ ]

button.

●To restore the [ ] button, [ ]([ ]) button, and movie button

to their defaults, choose [ ], [ ] and [ ] respectively.

●If you don’t want to add functions to the [ ] button,

[]([ ]) button, and movie button, choose [ ], [ ] and [ ]

respectively.

●Icons labeled with [ ] in the [ ] button, [ ]([ ]) button and

movie button assignment screen indicate that the function is not

available in the current shooting mode or under current function

conditions.

●Assign [ ] to a button, and every time the button is pressed, the

camera will switch between saving or not saving simultaneous

RAW images.

●Assign [ ] to a button, and the camera will use the dened

aperture value while the button is pressed, letting you preview the

depth of eld.

●Assign [ ] to a button, and the screen display will disappear

when the button is pressed. Perform one of the following actions

to restore the display.

- Press a button other than the power button

- Turn the exposure compensation dial, mode dial, or [ ][ ]

dials

- Change the camera’s vertical/horizontal orientation

- Open or close the ash

- Open the LCD monitor and rotate it upward all the way, or close

the LCD monitor when rotated upward all the way

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items

(My Menu)

Still Images Movies

You can save up to six commonly used shooting menu items on the

[ 1] tab. By customizing the [ 1] tab, you can access to these items

quickly from a single screen.

1 Access the setting screen.

●Press the [ ] button, choose [My

Menu settings] on the [ 1] tab, and then

press the [ ] button (=

32).

2 Congure the setting.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [Select items], and then

press the [ ] button.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose a menu item to save (max.

six items) and then press the [ ] button

to save it.

●[] is displayed.

●To cancel saving, press the [ ] button.

[ ] is no longer displayed.

●Press the [ ] button.

●To edit saved settings (except their shooting mode), choose [ ],

change the settings, and then repeat steps 2 – 3. These setting

details are not applied in other shooting modes.

●To reset saved settings to their defaults, choose [Clear settings]

in step 2, press the [ ] button, and then choose [OK] and press

the [ ] button.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

3 Rearrange menu items as needed.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [Sort], and then press the

[ ] button.

●Choose a menu item to move (either

press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial), and then press the [ ] button.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to change the order, and then press

the [ ] button.

●Press the [ ] button.

●Grayed-out items in step 2 can also be specied, but they may

not be available in some shooting modes.

●To make My Menu immediately accessible by pressing the

[] button in Shooting mode, choose [Set default view] to

choose [Yes].

●On the [Select items] screen for saving or clearing items, you can

also touch items to select them.

●On the [Sort] screen, you can also drag items to change the

display order.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Viewing

Still Images Movies

After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as

follows.

1 Enter Playback mode.

●Press the [ ] button.

●Your last shot is displayed.

2 Choose images.

●To view the previous image, press

the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial

counterclockwise. To view the next

image, press the [ ] button or turn the

[ ] dial clockwise.

●Press and hold the [ ][ ] buttons to

browse through images quickly.

●To access this screen (Scroll Display

mode), turn the [ ] dial rapidly. In this

mode, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the

[ ] dial to browse through images.

●To return to single-image display, press

the [ ] button.

●To browse images grouped by shooting

date, press the [ ][ ] buttons in Scroll

Display mode.

●Movies are identied by a [ ] icon.

To play movies, go to step 3.

Playback Mode

Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit them in many ways

●To prepare the camera for these operations, press the [ ] button to

enter Playback mode.

●It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were

renamed or already edited on a computer, or images from other

cameras.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Touch-Screen Operations

●To view the next image, drag right to

left across the screen, and to view the

previous image, drag left to right.

●To access Scroll Display mode, quickly

drag left or right repeatedly.

●You can also choose images in Scroll

Display mode by dragging left or right.

●Touching the central image will restore

single-image display.

●To browse images grouped by shooting

date in Scroll Display mode, drag up or

down.

●To start movie playback, touch [ ] in step

3 of “Viewing” (=

94).

●To adjust the volume during movie

playback, quickly drag up or down across

the screen.

3 Play movies.

●To start playback, press the [ ] button,

press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],

and then press the [ ] button again.

4 Adjust the volume.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the

volume.

●To adjust the volume when the volume

indicator (1) is no longer displayed, press

the [ ][ ] buttons.

5 Pause playback.

●To pause or resume playback, press the

[ ] button.

●After the movie is nished, [ ] is

displayed.

●To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the

shutter button halfway.

●To deactivate Scroll Display, choose MENU (=

32), > [ 3]

tab > [Scroll Display] > [Off].

●To have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback

mode, choose MENU (=

32), > [ 3] tab, > [Resume] > [Last

shot].

●To change the transition shown between images, access MENU

32), and choose your desired effect on the [ 3] tab >

[Transition Effect].

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Switching Display Modes

Press the [ ] button in playback mode to switch between no

information display, information display 1 (basic info), and information

display 2 (details).

●Switching display modes is not possible while the camera is

connected via Wi-Fi to devices other than printers.

Dening Displayed Shooting Data

You can set up the screens to display the information you want. For details

on the information displayed on each screen, see “Playback” (=

175).

1 Access the setting screen.

●Select [Playback information display] on

the [ 4] tab and press the [ ] button.

2 Select the information to display.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose the info you want displayed

and then press the [ ] button to add a

[ ].

●To return to the menu screen, press the

[] button.

●Use the display sample on the left side of the screen to see what

your selected effect in step 2 will look like.

●Place a [ ] on [Info display 2] to display settings info from [ ]

mode. When you press the [ ] button, you will see [ ]

settings, followed by [Info Display 2].

●To stop movie playback, touch the

screen. This screen is displayed, and the

camera is ready for your next operation.

- Touch [ ] to display the volume panel,

and then touch [ ][ ] to adjust the

volume.

- To switch frames, touch the scrollbar or

drag left or right.

- To resume playback, touch [ ].

- Touch [ ] to return to the screen in

step 2 of “Viewing” (=

93).

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting

Still Images (Digest Movies)

Still Images Movies

View digest movies recorded automatically in [ ] mode (=

37) on a

day of still image shooting as follows.

1 Choose an image.

●Still images shot in [ ] mode are

labeled with a [ ] icon.

●Choose a still image labeled with

[] and press the [ ] button.

2 Play the movie.

●Press the [ ] button, and then choose

[] in the menu (=

31).

●The movie recorded automatically on the

day of still image shooting is played back,

from the beginning.

●After a moment, [ ] will no longer be displayed when

you are using the camera with information display deactivated

95).

●You can also play digest movies by touching [ ] on the

screen in step 1 and touching [ ] on the screen in step 2.

Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights)

Still Images Movies

Washed-out highlights in the image ash on the screen in info displays 2

to 6 (=

95).

Brightness Histogram

Still Images Movies

●The graph displayed on the top of

information displays 2-6 is a histogram

that shows the distribution of brightness

in the image. The horizontal axis

represents the degree of brightness, and

the vertical axis, how much of the image

is at each level of brightness. Viewing the

histogram is a way to check exposure.

RGB Histogram

Still Images Movies

●Information display 3 displays an RGB

histogram that shows the distribution

of shades of red, green, and blue in an

image. The horizontal axis represents R,

G, or B brightness, and the vertical axis,

how much of the image is at that level

of brightness. Viewing this histogram

enables you to check image color

characteristics.

●Choose info displays 2 – 6 from the [Playback information display]

screen on the [ 4] tab, press the [ ] button, press the

[][ ] buttons to choose [RGB], and then press the [ ] button.

The brightness histogram will then be displayed on the bottom of

info display 3.

●The histogram can also be accessed while shooting (=

174).

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Browsing and Filtering Images

Navigating through Images in an Index

Still Images Movies

By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly nd the images

you are looking for.

1 Display images in an index.

●Press the [ ] button to display images

in an index. Press it again to increase the

number of images shown.

●To display fewer images, press the [ ]

button. Fewer images are shown with

each press.

2 Choose an image.

●Turn the [ ] dial to scroll through the

images.

●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose

an image.

●An orange frame is displayed around the

selected image.

●Press the [ ] button to view the selected

image in single-image display.

●To deactivate the 3D display effect (shown if you hold down the

[][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial rapidly), choose MENU

32) > [ 3] tab > [Index Effect] > [Off].

Viewing by Date

Digest movies can be viewed by date.

1 Choose a movie.

●Press the [ ] button, choose [List/

Play Digest Movies] on the [ 1] tab,

and then choose a date (=

32).

2 Play the movie.

●Press the [ ] button to start playback.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Finding Images Matching Specied Conditions

Still Images Movies

Find desired images quickly on a memory card full of images by ltering

image display according to your specied conditions. You can also protect

102) or delete (=

105) these images all at once.

Rating Displays images with dened ratings (=

108).

Shot Date Displays the images shot on a specic date.

People Displays images with detected faces.

Still image/

Movie

Displays still images, movies, or movies shot in

[] mode (=

37).

1 Choose the rst condition for image

display or navigation.

●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the

menu, press the [ ] button, and then

press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a

condition.

●If you chose [ ], press the [ ][ ]

buttons or turn the [ ] dial to display the

ltered images. To perform an action for

all of these images together, press the

[ ] button and go to step 3.

2 Choose the second condition and

check the images found.

●If you selected [ ], [ ] or [ ] for your

rst condition, press the [ ][ ] buttons to

select a second condition and then turn

the [ ] dial to view the images found.

●To switch to ltered image display, press

the [ ] button and go to step 3.

Touch-Screen Operations

●Pinch in to switch from single-image

display to index display.

●To view more thumbnails per screen,

pinch in again.

●Drag up or down on the screen to scroll

through displayed images.

●To view fewer thumbnails per screen,

spread your ngers apart.

●Touch an image to choose it, and touch it

again to view it in single-image display.

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Using the Front Dial to Jump between Images

Displays images with dened ratings

108).

Jumps to the rst image in each group of

images that were shot on the same date.

Jumps by 10 images at a time.

Jumps by 100 images at a time.

1 Choose a condition.

●Choose a condition (or jump method)

in single-image display by turning the

[] dial and then pressing the [ ][ ]

buttons.

2 View images matching your

specied condition, or jump by the

specied amount.

●Turn the [ ] dial to view only images

matching the condition or jump by the

specied number of images forward or

back.

●[ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] are displayed when there are

images for each corresponding rating. [ ] and [ ] are displayed

whenever there are any images with ratings applied to them.

●[] allows you to jump to the Favorites screen with all ratings

displayed.

●Turning the [ ] dial when browsing images in index display

will jump to the previous or next image according to the jump

method chosen in single-image display. However, if you have

chosen [ ] or [ ], the jump method will be switched to [ ].

3 View the ltered images.

●Images matching your conditions are

displayed in yellow frames. To view only

these images, press the [ ][ ] buttons or

turn the [ ] dial.

●To leave the ltered image display, press

the [ ] button, select [ ] from the

menu, and then press the [ ] button.

●When the camera has found no corresponding images for some

conditions, those conditions will not be available.

●To hide or view other information, press the [ ] button in

step 2.

●Options for viewing the images found (in step 3) include

“Navigating through Images in an Index” (=

97), “Magnifying

Images” (=

100), and “Viewing Slideshows” (=

101). You can

also apply image operations to all images found, by choosing

[Protect All Images in Search] in “Protecting Images” (=

102),

“Erasing Multiple Images at Once” (=

105), “Adding Images to

the Print List (DPOF)” (=

164), or [Select All Images in Search]

in “Adding Images to a Photobook” (=

166).

●If you edit images and save them as new images (=

109 –

112), a message is displayed, and the images that were

found are no longer shown.

●Press the [ ] button and select [Image Search] on the

[1] tab for the same function.

●You can also choose conditions by touching the screens in steps

1 and 2.

100

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Image Viewing Options

Magnifying Images

Still Images Movies

1 Magnify an image.

●Pressing the [ ] button will zoom in and

magnify the image. You can magnify

images up to about 10x by continuing to

hold the button down.

●The approximate position of the displayed

area (1) is shown for reference.

●To zoom out, press the [ ] button. You

can return to single-image display by

continuing to hold it.

2 Move the display position and

switch images as needed.

●To move the display position, press

the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons. Press [ ] to

move to the focus frame area used when

shooting.

●To switch to other images while zoomed,

turn the [ ] dial.

●You can return to single-image display from magnied display by

pressing the [ ] button.

●Go to [Magnify (approx.)] on the [ 4] tab of the menu to dene

the magnication used when pressing the [ ] button during

single-image display. If set to [Reuse last magnication], the

display will be magnied to the level before the [ ] button

was pressed in the previous magnied image.

Touch-Screen Operations

●You can also jump to the previous or next

image according to your jump method

chosen in step 1 of “Using the Front Dial

to Jump between Images” (=

99) by

dragging left or right with two ngers.

101

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Viewing Slideshows

Still Images Movies

Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows.

●Press the [ ] button, and then

choose [Slideshow] on the [ 1] tab

32).

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [Start], and then press the

[ ] button.

●The slideshow will start after [Loading

image] is displayed for a few seconds.

●Press the [ ] button to stop the

slideshow.

●The camera’s power-saving functions (=

28) are deactivated

during slideshows.

●To pause or resume slideshows, press the [ ] button.

●You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the

[][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial. For fast-forward or fast-

rewind, hold the [ ][ ] buttons down.

●Choose [Set up] and press the [ ] button to set up slideshows

to repeat, change the transitions between images, and adjust the

display duration of each image (=

32).

●You can also stop slideshows by touching the screen.

Touch-Screen Operations

●Spread your ngers apart (pinch out) to

zoom in.

●You can magnify images up to about 10x

by repeating this action.

●To move the display position, drag across

the screen.

●Pinch in to zoom out.

●Touch [ ] to restore single-image

display.

102

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Using the Menu

1 Access the setting screen.

●Press the [ ] button and choose

[Protect] on the [ 1] tab (=

32).

2 Choose a selection method.

●Choose an option as desired (=

32).

●To return to the menu screen, press the

[] button.

Protecting Images

Still Images Movies

Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure (=

105).

●Press the [ ] button, select

[ ] from the menu, and then use the

[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to

select [ ]. This will display the [ ]

icon.

●Press the [ ] button again to remove the

[ ] icon and unprotect the image.

●Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format

the card (=

138).

●Protected images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure

function. To erase them this way, rst cancel protection.

103

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Selecting a Range

1 Choose [Select Range].

●Following step 2 in “Using the Menu”

102), choose [Select Range] and

press the [ ] button.

2 Choose a starting image.

●Press the [ ] button.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose an image, and then press

the [ ] button.

Choosing Images Individually

1 Choose [Select].

●Following step 2 in “Using the Menu”

102), choose [Select] and press the

[ ] button.

2 Choose an image.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose an image, and then press

the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed.

●To cancel selection, press the [ ] button

again. [ ] is no longer displayed.

●Repeat this process to specify other

images.

3 Protect the image.

●Press the [ ] button. A conrmation

message is displayed.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [OK], and then press the

[ ] button.

●Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or

turn the camera off before nishing the setup process in step 3.

●You can also select or clear images by touching the screen in

step 2, and you can access the conrmation screen by touching

[].

●You can also protect images by touching [OK] on the screen in

step 3.

104

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Protecting All Images at Once

1 Choose [Protect All Images].

●Following step 2 in “Using the Menu”

102), choose [Protect All Images]

and press the [ ] button.

2 Protect the images.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [OK], and then press the

[ ] button.

Clearing All Protection at Once

You can clear protection from all images at once.

To clear protection, choose [Unprotect All Images] in step 1 of “Protecting

All Images at Once”, and then complete step 2.

3 Choose an ending image.

●Press the [ ] button to choose [Last

image], and then press the [ ] button.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose an image, and then press

the [ ] button.

●Images before the rst image cannot be

selected as the last image.

4 Protect the images.

●Press the [ ] button to choose [Protect],

and then press the [ ] button.

●You can also choose the rst or last image by turning the [ ] dial

when the top screen in steps 2 and 3 is displayed.

●To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in

step 4.

●You can also display the screen for choosing the rst or last

image by touching an image on the top screen in steps 2 or 3.

●You can also protect images by touching [Protect] on the screen

in step 4.

105

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Erasing Multiple Images at Once

You can choose multiple images to erase at once. Be careful when

erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected

images (=

102) cannot be erased.

Choosing a Selection Method

1 Access the setting screen.

●Press the [ ] button, and then

choose [Erase] on the [ 1] tab

32).

2 Choose a selection method.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose a selection method, and

then press the [ ] button.

●To return to the menu screen, press the

[] button.

Choosing Images Individually

1 Choose [Select].

●Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection

Method” (=

105), choose [Select] and

press the [ ] button.

2 Choose an image.

●Once you choose an image following

step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually”

103), [ ] is displayed.

●To cancel selection, press the [ ] button

again. [ ] is no longer displayed.

Erasing Images

Still Images Movies

You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful

when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However,

protected images (=

102) cannot be erased.

1 Choose an image to erase.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose an image.

2 Erase the image.

●Press the [ ] button.

●After [Erase?] is displayed, press the

[][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to

choose [Erase], and then press the [ ]

button.

●The current image is now erased.

●To cancel erasure, press the [ ][ ]

buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose

[Cancel], and then press the [ ] button.

●Press the [ ] button when displaying an image with both RAW

and JPEG les to select between [Erase ], [Erase JPEG] or

[Erase + JPEG]. Select your preferred option to erase the les.

●You can also erase the current image by touching [Erase] on the

screen in step 2.

106

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Selecting a Range

1 Choose [Select Range].

●Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection

Method” (=

105), choose [Select

Range] and press the [ ] button.

2 Choose images.

●Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”

103) to specify images.

3 Erase the images.

●Press the [ ] button to choose [Erase],

and then press the [ ] button.

Specifying All Images at Once

1 Choose [Select All Images].

●Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection

Method” (=

105), choose [Select All

Images] and press the [ ] button.

2 Erase the images.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [OK], and then press the

[ ] button.

●Repeat this process to specify other

images.

3 Erase the image.

●Press the [ ] button. A conrmation

message is displayed.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [OK], and then press the

[ ] button.

●If you select an image with both RAW and JPEG les, both will

be erased.

107

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Using the Menu

1 Choose [Rotate].

●Press the [ ] button and choose

[Rotate] on the [ 1] tab (=

32).

2 Rotate the image.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose an image.

●Press the [ ] button to rotate the image

90° clockwise. Press it again to rotate it

90° counterclockwise, and press it a third

time to restore the image to normal.

●To return to the menu screen, press the

[] button.

●On the screen in step 2, you can also touch [ ] to rotate

images or touch [ ] to return to the menu screen.

Rotating Images

Still Images Movies

Change the orientation of images and save them as follows.

1 Choose [ ].

●Press the [ ] button, and then choose

[ ] in the menu (=

31).

2 Rotate the image.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to select [ ] or [ ] and rotate the

image 90° in the specied direction.

Press the [ ] button to conrm the

rotation.

●Rotation is not possible when [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off]

108).

108

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Applying Ratings

Still Images Movies

You can organize images by giving them ratings (levels). These levels run

between [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] and [ ]. By choosing a rating, you

can restrict the following operations to all images with the same rating.

●“Viewing” (=

93), “Viewing Slideshows” (=

101), “Protecting

Images” (=

102), “Erasing Images” (=

105), “Adding Images to

the Print List (DPOF)” (=

164), “Adding Images to a Photobook”

166)

●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the

menu, and then assign a rating (=

31).

●To remove ratings, repeat this process

but choose [ ] and then press the [ ]

button.

Using the Menu

1 Choose [Rating].

●Press the [ ] button and choose

[Rating] on the [ 1] tab (=

32).

2 Choose image and rating.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose an image, and then press

the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a rating.

Deactivating Auto Rotation

Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation, which rotates

images based on the current camera orientation.

●Press the [ ] button, choose [Auto

Rotate] on the [ 3] tab, and then

choose [Off] (=

32).

●Images cannot be rotated (=

107) when you set [Auto Rotate]

to [Off]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in

the original orientation.

109

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Editing Still Images

●Image editing (=

109 – =

112) is only available when the

memory card has sufcient free space.

●When [ ] is shown on a screen, you can touch [ ]

instead of pressing the [ ] button, if you prefer.

●When [ ] is shown on a screen, you can touch [ ]

instead of pressing the [ ] button, if you prefer.

Resizing Images

Still Images Movies

Save a copy of images at a lower number of recording pixels.

1 Choose an image size.

●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the

menu, and choose a size (=

31).

●Press the [ ] button.

2 Save the new image.

●After [Save new image?] is displayed,

press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [OK], and then press the

[ ] button.

3 Finish the setup process.

●Press the [ ] button. A conrmation

message is displayed.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [OK], and then press the

[ ] button.

●Images will not be rated if you switch to Shooting mode or turn the

camera off before nishing the setup process in step 3.

●In step 2, you can also rate images by touching the [ ][ ]

buttons.

110

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Cropping

Still Images Movies

You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image le.

1 Access the setting screen.

●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the

menu, and then press the [ ] button

31).

2 Set the cropping frame size,

position, and aspect ratio.

●Press the [ ] or [ ] button to change

the size of the frame.

●Use the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to move

the frame.

●To change the orientation of the frame,

turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ] and press

the [ ] button.

●To change the frame’s aspect ratio,

turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ].

The aspect ratio will switch between

([ ][ ][ ][ ]) with each press of the

[ ] button.

3 Check the cropped image.

●Turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ].

●Press [ ] to toggle the screen between

the cropped image and the cropping

frame display.

3 Review the new image.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [Yes], and then press the

[ ] button.

●The saved image is now displayed.

●Editing is not possible for images shot at a recording pixel setting

of [ ] (=

43).

●RAW images cannot be edited.

●In step 1, choose [ ] to stop resizing the image.

●Images cannot be resized to a higher number of recording pixels.

Using the Menu

1 Choose [Resize].

●Press the [ ] button and choose

[Resize] on the [ 2] tab (=

32).

2 Choose an image.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose an image, and then press

the [ ] button.

3 Choose an image size.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose the size, and then press

the [ ] button.

4 Save as a new image and review.

●Follow step 2 in “Resizing Images”

109).

●Press the [ ] button, and then

follow step 3 in “Resizing Images”

109).

111

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Applying Filter Effects

You can apply the effects of the following shooting modes to an image and

save it as a new image: [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ].

1 Select the effect type.

●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in

the menu, and choose an effect type

31).

●Press the [ ] button.

2 Congure details.

●For [ ] mode, press the [ ][ ] buttons or

turn the [ ] dial to adjust the contrast.

●For [ ] mode, press the [ ][ ] buttons or

turn the [ ] dial to adjust blurring.

●For [ ] or [ ] modes, press the [ ][ ]

buttons or turn the [ ] dial to adjust the

strength of the effect.

●For [ ] mode, press the [ ][ ] buttons

or turn the [ ] dial to adjust the intensity

of the colors.

●For [ ] mode, press the [ ][ ] buttons

or turn the [ ] dial to adjust the color

tone.

●For [ ], press the [ ] button to

resize the frame and press the [ ][ ]

buttons to move it.

4 Save as a new image and review.

●Turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then

press the [ ] button.

●Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Resizing Images”

109).

●Editing is not possible for images shot at [ ] resolution.

●RAW images cannot be edited.

●You cannot crop an image that has already been cropped.

●You cannot apply a Creative lter or resizing to a cropped image.

●Cropped images will have a lower number of recording pixels than

uncropped images.

●In step 3, while the cropped image is displayed, you can still

change the crop position, size and aspect ratio.

●Step 2 can also be performed by pressing the [ ] button,

choosing [Cropping] on the [ 2] tab, pressing the [ ] button,

selecting an image and pressing [ ] again.

●In step 2, you can move the frame by dragging it around the

screen. Pinch or spread out your ngers (=

101) to change the

size of the frame.

●In step 2, you can also touch [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] on the

screen.

112

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

3 Correct the image.

●Press the [ ] button.

●Red-eye detected by the camera is now

corrected, and frames are displayed

around corrected image areas.

●Enlarge or reduce images as needed.

Follow the steps in “Magnifying Images”

100).

4 Save as a new image and review.

●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn

the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and

then press the [ ] button.

●The image is now saved as a new le.

●Press the [ ] button, and then

follow step 3 in “Resizing Images”

109).

●Some images may not be corrected accurately.

●To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose

[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be

erased.

●Protected images cannot be overwritten.

●RAW images cannot be edited this way.

●Red-eye correction can be applied to JPEG images saved with

RAW images, but the original image cannot be overwritten.

●You can save images by touching [New File] or [Overwrite] on the

screen in step 4.

3 Save as a new image and review.

●Press the [ ] button.

●Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Resizing Images”

109).

●To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical in [ ] mode,

press the [ ][ ] buttons in step 2. To move the frame, press the

[][ ] buttons again. To return the frame to horizontal orientation,

press the [ ][ ] buttons.

●This can also be done by pressing the [ ] button, selecting

[Creative lters] on the [ 1] tab, selecting an image and

pressing the [ ] button.

●In step 1, choose [ ] to not apply an effect to the image.

●In step 2, you can also touch and drag the bar across the bottom

of the screen to edit images. You can also move the frame by

touching or dragging across the screen in [ ] mode.

Correcting Red-Eye

Still Images Movies

Automatically corrects images affected by red-eye. You can save the

corrected image as a separate le.

1 Choose [Red-Eye Correction].

●Press the [ ] button, and then

choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the [ 2]

tab (=

32).

2 Choose an image.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose an image.

113

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

●To cancel editing, press the [ ]

button, choose [OK] (either press the

[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and

then press the [ ] button again.

4 Save the edited movie.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],

and then press the [ ] button.

●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn

the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and

then press the [ ] button.

●Choose [Save w/o Comp.], and then

press the [ ] button.

●The movie is now saved as a new le.

●To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose

[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be

erased.

●If the memory card lacks sufcient space, only [Overwrite] will be

available.

●Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving

is in progress.

●When editing movies, you should use a fully charged battery pack

or an AC adapter kit (sold separately, =

148).

Editing Movies

Still Images Movies

You can remove unneeded portions from the beginning and end of movies

(excluding digest movies, =

37).

1 Choose [ ].

●Following steps 1 – 5 in “Viewing”

93), choose [ ] and press the [ ]

button.

●The movie editing panel and editing bar

are now displayed.

2 Specify portions to cut.

●(1) is the movie editing panel, and (2) is

the editing bar.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ]

or [ ].

●To view the portions you can cut

(identied by [ ] on the screen), press

the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to

move [ ]. Cut the beginning of the movie

(from [ ]) by choosing [ ], and cut the

end of the movie by choosing [ ].

●If you move [ ] to a position other than a

[ ] mark, in [ ] the portion before the

nearest [ ] mark on the left will be cut,

while in [ ] the portion after the nearest

[ ] mark on the right will be cut.

3 Review the edited movie.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],

and then press the [ ] button. The edited

movie is now played.

●To edit the movie again, repeat step 2.

114

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Reducing File Sizes

Movie le sizes can be reduced by compressing movies as follows.

●On the screen in step 2 of “Editing

Movies”, choose [ ]. Choose [New File],

and then press the [ ] button.

●Choose [Compress & Sav.], and then

press the [ ] button.

Image quality after compression is as follows.

Pre-compression Post-compression

●[ ] and [ ] movies cannot be compressed.

●Edited movies cannot be saved in compressed format when you

choose [Overwrite].

●However, you can compress and save edited movies as new les

by choosing [Compress & Sav.].

Editing Digest Movies

Still Images Movies

Individual chapters (clips) (=

37) recorded in [ ] mode can be

erased as needed. Be careful when erasing clips, because they cannot be

recovered.

1 Select the clip to erase.

●Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Viewing Short

Movies Created When Shooting Still

Images (Digest Movies)” (=

96) to

play a movie created in [ ] mode, and

then press the [ ] button to access the

movie control panel.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [ ] or [ ], and then press

the [ ] button.

2 Choose [ ].

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ]

button.

●The selected clip is played back

repeatedly.

3 Conrm erasure.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [OK], and then press the

[ ] button.

●The clip is erased, and the short movie is

overwritten.

●[ ] is not displayed if you select a clip when the camera is

connected to a printer.

115

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Available Wi-Fi Features

You can send and receive images and control the camera remotely by

connecting it to these devices and services via Wi-Fi.

Smartphones and tablet devices *1

●Importing images (=

116)

●Remote shooting (=

133)

(CANON iMAGE GATEWAY *2)

Web services

●Saving and sharing images (=

122)

●Sending to PC (=

131)

Canon Wi-Fi-compatible

cameras

●Converting images

129)

Printer *3

●Printing images (=

127) DLNA-compatible media

players *4

●Viewing images (=

126)

*1 For convenience in this manual, smartphones, tablets and other compatible

devices are referred to collectively as “smartphones”.

*2 CANON iMAGE GATEWAY is Canon’s online photo service.

*3 The printer must support PictBridge (supporting DPS over IP), which allows

direct photo printing via Wi-Fi.

*4 DLNA stands for Digital Living Network Alliance.

Wi-Fi Functions

Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety of compatible

devices, and use the camera with Web services

●Before using the Wi-Fi function, ensure that you read the “Wi-Fi

(Wireless LAN) Precautions” (=

200).

116

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

2 Establish the connection.

●Touch the N-Mark ( ) on the smartphone

with EOS Remote installed against the

camera’s N-Mark.

●The camera starts up automatically.

●When the [Device Nickname] screen is

displayed, press the [ ] button. Use the

keyboard (=

33) to enter a nickname,

then press the [ ] button to return

to the [Device Nickname] screen.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [OK], and then press the

[ ] button.

●EOS Remote starts up on the

smartphone and automatically connects

to the camera.

3 Adjust the privacy setting.

●When this screen is displayed, press the

[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to

choose [All images], and then press the

[ ] button.

●After a connection is established with

the smartphone, this screen will close in

about one minute.

4 Import images.

●Use the smartphone to import images

from the camera to the smartphone.

Importing Images into a Smartphone

There are the following two ways to import images from the camera into a

smartphone.

●Connect via NFC (=

116)

Simply touch an NFC-compatible Android smartphone (OS version 4.0

or later) against the camera to connect the devices.

●Connect via the Wi-Fi menu (=

118)

Sending Images to an NFC-Compatible Smartphone

Use an Android (OS version 4.0 or later) smartphone’s NFC to simplify the

process of installing EOS Remote and connecting to the camera.

●If the camera is off or in Shooting mode when the devices are touched

together, you can choose and transfer images from the camera to the

smartphone. Once the devices are connected, you can also shoot

remotely (=

133). It’s easy to reconnect to recent devices, which are

listed in the Wi-Fi menu.

●If the camera is in Playback mode when the devices are touched

together, images appear in index display. You can choose and send

images on the image selection screen.

Connecting via NFC When Camera Is Off or in

Shooting Mode

1 Install EOS Remote.

●Activate NFC on the smartphone and

touch the device against the camera’s

N-Mark ( ) to start Google Play on the

smartphone automatically. Once the EOS

Remote download page is displayed,

download and install the app.

117

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in Playback

Mode

●Press the [ ] button to turn the camera

on.

●Touch the smartphone with EOS Remote

installed (=

119) against the camera’s

N-Mark ( ).

●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose

an image to send, and then press the [ ]

button. [ ] is displayed.

●To cancel selection, press the [ ] button

again. [ ] is no longer displayed.

●Repeat this process to choose additional

images.

●After you nish choosing images, press

the [ ] button.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose

[Send], and then press the [ ] button.

●The images are sent.

●To disconnect, remove the [ ] mark from

all the images, press the [ ] button,

and then press [ ][ ] to choose [OK].

●If during connection a message on the camera or smartphone

requests you to enter the nickname, follow step 2 in “Connecting

via NFC When Camera Is Off or in Shooting Mode” (=

116) to

enter it.

●The camera does not keep a record of smartphones you connect

to via NFC in Playback mode.

●When using NFC, keep the following points in mind.

- Avoid strong impact between the camera and smartphone. This

may damage the devices.

- Depending on the smartphone, the devices may not recognize

each other immediately. In this case, try holding the devices

together in slightly different positions. If connection fails, keep

the devices together until the camera screen is updated.

- Do not place other objects between the camera and

smartphone. Also, note that camera or smartphone covers or

similar accessories may block communication.

●Select [All images] in step 3 when shooting remotely.

●All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected

smartphone when you choose [All images] in step 3. Select

another option in step 3 to place restrictions on camera images

viewable from the smartphone (=

135). Once you have

registered a smartphone, you can change privacy settings for it

on the camera (=

135).

●When the mode dial is set to [ ], a smartphone cannot be

connected.

●Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.

●A message is displayed if the nickname you enter begins with

a symbol or space. Press the [ ] button and enter a different

nickname.

118

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

4 Choose [Add a Device].

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [Add a Device], and then

press the [ ] button.

●The camera’s SSID and password are

displayed.

5 Connect the smartphone to the

network.

●In the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting menu,

choose the SSID (network name)

displayed on the camera to establish a

connection.

●In the password eld, enter the password

displayed on the camera.

6 Start EOS Remote.

●Start EOS Remote on the smartphone.

7 Select the camera.

●A screen appears on the smartphone that

lets you select which camera to connect

to. Select the camera to begin pairing.

Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu

Before connecting to the camera, you must install the free dedicated

“EOS Remote” app on the smartphone. For details on this application

(supported smartphones and included functions), refer to the Canon

website.

These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can

also use an existing access point (=

119).

1 Install the dedicated app.

●For Android smartphones, nd EOS

Remote in Google Play and download

and install the app.

●For an iPhone or iPad, nd EOS Remote

in the App Store and download and install

the app.

2 Access the Wi-Fi menu.

●Press the [ ] button to turn the camera

on.

●Press the [ ] button.

●When the [Device Nickname] screen is

displayed, press the [ ] button. Use the

keyboard (=

33) to enter a nickname,

and then press the [ ] button to

return to the [Device Nickname] screen.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [OK], and then press the

[ ] button.

3 Choose [ ].

●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn

the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press

the [ ] button.

119

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

●Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.

●A message is displayed if the nickname you enter begins with

a symbol or space. Press the [ ] button and enter a different

nickname.

●To connect without entering a password in step 5, go to the menu

32), choose the [ 4] tab, and set [Password] to [Off] in [Wi-

Fi Settings]. [Password] is no longer displayed in the SSID display

screen (step 4).

●If you have previously connected to devices, recent destinations

will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu. You can easily

connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the

device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a new device,

display the device selection screen by touching [ ][ ], and then

congure the setting.

●If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU

32) > [ 4] tab > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Target History] > [Off].

Using Another Access Point

You can also use an existing access point when connecting the camera to

a smartphone through the Wi-Fi menu.

Also refer to the access point user manual.

8 Adjust the privacy setting.

●When this screen is displayed, press the

[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to

choose [All images], and then press the

[ ] button.

●After a connection is established with

the smartphone, this screen will close in

about one minute.

9 Import images.

●Use the smartphone to import images

from the camera to the smartphone.

●Select [All images] in step 8 when shooting remotely.

●All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected

smartphone when you choose [All images] in step 8. Select

another option in step 8 to place restrictions on camera images

viewable from the smartphone (=

135). Once you have

registered a smartphone, you can change privacy settings for it

on the camera (=

135).

●When the mode dial is set to [ ], a smartphone cannot be

connected.

120

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Using WPS-Compatible Access Points

WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over

Wi-Fi. You can use either Push Button Conguration Method or PIN

Method for settings on a WPS supported device.

1 Connect the smartphone to the

access point.

2 Prepare for the connection.

●Follow steps 1 – 4 in “Adding a

Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu”

118) to access the [Waiting to

connect] screen.

3 Choose [Switch Network].

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [Switch Network], and

then press the [ ] button.

●A list of detected access points will be

displayed.

4 Choose [WPS Connection].

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [WPS Connection], and

then press the [ ] button.

5 Choose [PBC Method].

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [PBC Method], and then

press the [ ] button.

Conrming Access Point Compatibility

Conrm that the Wi-Fi router or base station conforms to the Wi-Fi

standards in “Wi-Fi” (=

194).

Connection methods vary depending on whether the access point

supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS, =

120) or not (=

121). For

non-WPS access points, check the following information.

●Network name (SSID/ESSID)

The SSID or ESSID for the access point you use. Also called the

“access point name” or “network name”.

●Network authentication / data encryption (encryption method /

encryption mode)

The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission. Check

which security setting is used: WPA2-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK

(TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA-PSK (TKIP), WEP (open system

authentication), or no security.

●Password (encryption key / network key)

The key used when encrypting data during wireless transmission. Also

called the “encryption key” or “network key”.

●Key index (transmit key)

The key set when WEP is used for network authentication / data

encryption. Use “1” as the setting.

●If system administrator status is needed to adjust network

settings, contact the system administrator for details.

●These settings are very important for network security. Exercise

adequate caution when changing these settings.

●For information on WPS compatibility and for instructions on

checking settings, refer to the access point user manual.

●A router is a device that creates a network (LAN) structure for

connecting multiple computers. A router that contains an internal

Wi-Fi function is called a “Wi-Fi router”.

●This guide refers to all Wi-Fi routers and base stations as “access points”.

●If you use MAC address ltering on your Wi-Fi network, be sure

to add the camera’s MAC address to your access point. You can

check your camera’s MAC address in the menu

32).

Choose

the [ 4] tab and select [Check MAC Address] in [Wi-Fi Settings].

121

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Connecting to Listed Access Points

1 View the listed access points.

●View the listed networks (access points)

as described in steps 1 – 3 of “Using

WPS-Compatible Access Points”

120).

2 Choose an access point.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose a network (access point),

and then press the [ ] button.

3 Enter the access point password.

●Press the [ ] button to access the

keyboard and enter the password

33).

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [Next], and then press the

[ ] button.

4 Choose [Auto].

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [Auto], and then press the

[ ] button.

6 Establish the connection.

●On the access point, hold down the WPS

connection button for a few seconds.

●On the camera, press the [ ] button to

go to the next step.

7 Import images.

●Follow steps 6 – 9 in “Adding a

Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu”

118) to choose the smartphone,

adjust the privacy setting, and then import

the images.

●If you chose [PIN Method] in step 5, a PIN code will be displayed

on the screen. Be sure to set this code in the access point.

Choose a device in the [Select a Device] screen. For further

details, refer to the user manual included with your access point.

122

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Sending Images to a Registered

Web Service

Registering Web Services

Use a smartphone or computer to add to the camera Web services that

you want to use.

●A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is

required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY

and other Web services.

●Check the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser

(Microsoft Internet Explorer, etc.) requirements, including settings and

version information.

●For information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE

GATEWAY is available, visit the Canon website (http://www.canon.

com/cig/).

●You must have an account with Web services other than CANON

iMAGE GATEWAY if you desire to use them. For further details, check

the websites for each Web service you want to register.

●Separate ISP connection and access point fees may be applicable.

5 Import images.

●Follow steps 6 – 9 in “Adding a

Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu”

118) to select the smartphone to

connect to and to congure the privacy

settings, and then import the images.

●To determine the access point password, check on the access

point itself or refer to the user manual.

●Up to 16 access points will be displayed. If no access points are

detected even after you choose [Refresh] in step 2 to update the

list, choose [Manual Settings] in step 2 to complete access point

settings manually. Follow on-screen instructions and enter an

SSID, security settings, and a password.

●When you reconnect to a previous access point, “*” is displayed

for the password in step 3. To use the same password, choose

[Next] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial) and

press the [ ] button.

Previous Access Points

To reconnect to a previous access point automatically, follow step 4 in

“Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu” (=

118).

●To use the camera as an access point, choose [Switch Network] on the

screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then choose

[Camera Access Point Mode].

●To use a different access point, select [Switch Network] on the screen

displayed when you establish a connection, and then either follow step

4 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (=

120) or step 2 in

“Connecting to Listed Access Points” (=

121).

123

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

3 Access the Wi-Fi menu.

●Press the [ ] button to turn the camera

on.

●Press the [ ] button.

●If the [Device Nickname] screen is

displayed, press the [ ] button. Use the

keyboard (=

33) to enter a nickname,

and then press the [ ] button to

return to the [Device Nickname] screen.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [OK], and then press the

[ ] button.

4 Choose [ ].

●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn

the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then

press the [ ] button.

5 Choose [Authenticate].

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [Authenticate], and then

press the [ ] button.

Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY

After linking the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, add CANON

iMAGE GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera.

1 Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY

and access the camera link settings

page.

●From a computer or smartphone, access

http://www.canon.com/cig/ to visit

CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.

●Once the login screen is displayed,

enter your user name and password

to log in. If you do not have a CANON

iMAGE GATEWAY account, follow

the instructions to complete member

registration (free of charge).

●Access the camera settings page.

2 Choose the type of camera.

●On this camera model, [ ] is displayed

in the Wi-Fi menu.

●Once you choose [ ], a page is

displayed for entering the authentication

code. On this page in step 7, you will

enter the authentication code displayed

on the camera after steps 3 – 6.

124

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

●CANON iMAGE GATEWAY and [ ]

131) is now added as destinations,

and the [ ] icon changes to [ ].

●A message is displayed on the

smartphone or computer to indicate that

this process is nished. To add other

Web services, follow the procedure

in “Registering Other Web Services”

124) from step 2.

●Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in

the camera.

●Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent

destinations will be listed rst when you access the menu. Press

the [ ][ ] buttons to access the device selection screen and

choose a device.

Registering Other Web Services

You can also add Web services besides CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the

camera. Note that CANON iMAGE GATEWAY must be registered on the

camera rst (=

123).

1 Access the Web service settings

screen.

●Follow step 1 in “Registering CANON

iMAGE GATEWAY” (=

123) to log in

to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, and then

access the Web service settings screen.

2 Congure the Web service you want

to use.

●Follow the instructions displayed on the

smartphone or computer to set up the

Web service.

6 Establish a connection with an

access point.

●Connect to the access point as described

in steps 4 – 6 in “Using WPS-Compatible

Access Points” (=

120) or in steps 2 – 4

in “Connecting to Listed Access Points”

121).

●Once the camera is connected to CANON

iMAGE GATEWAY via the access point,

an authentication code is displayed.

●Keep this display on and available for

viewing until step 7 is complete.

7 Enter the authentication code.

●On the smartphone or computer, enter

the authentication code displayed on the

camera and go to the next step.

●A six-digit conrmation number is

displayed.

8 Check the conrmation number and

complete the setup process.

●On the second screen in step 6, press

the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial

to choose [OK], and then press the [ ]

button to display the conrmation number.

●Make sure the conrmation number on

the camera matches the number on the

smartphone or computer.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to

choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button.

●Complete the setup process on the

smartphone or computer.

125

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

3 Send an image.

●Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to

send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose

[Send this image], and then press the [ ]

button.

●When uploading to YouTube, read the

press the [ ] button.

●Image transfer will begin. The screen

darkens during image transfer.

●After the image is sent, [OK] is displayed.

Press the [ ] button to return to the

playback screen.

●Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in

the camera.

●You can also send multiple images at once, resize images, and

add comments before sending (=

130).

3 Choose [ ].

●In Playback mode, press the [ ] button

to access the Wi-Fi menu.

●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn

the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then

press the [ ] button.

●The Web service settings are now

updated.

●If any congured settings change, follow these steps again to

update the camera settings.

Uploading Images to Web Services

1 Access the Wi-Fi menu.

●Press the [ ] button to turn the camera

on.

●Press the [ ] button.

2 Choose the destination.

●Choose the icon of the Web service to

connect to (either press the [ ][ ][ ][ ]

buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then

press the [ ] button.

●If multiple recipients or sharing options

are used with a Web service, choose the

desired item on the [Select Recipient]

screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons

or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the

[ ] button.

126

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

●Once the media player is accessible,

this screen is displayed. The screen will

darken after a period of time.

●Perform operations on the media player

once connected. For details on controlling

the media player, refer to its instruction

manual.

4 Display the media player settings

screen on your TV set.

●Use your media player to bring up

[ EOS M3] on the TV screen.

●A different icon may be displayed

depending on the media player.

Locate the icon labeled [ EOS M3].

5 Display images.

●Choose [ EOS M3], the memory card

(SD or other card), the folder, and then

the image to view.

●Select an image to display it on the TV.

For details, refer to the media player’s

instruction manual.

● Press the [ ] button to close the

connection with the camera. If the screen

is darkened, press any button to bring

up the second screen shown in step 3

above, and then press the [ ] button.

Viewing Images Using a Media

Player

You can view images in your camera’s memory card on a TV or other

device.

This function requires a DLNA-compatible TV set, game system,

smartphone, or other media player. In this manual, the term “media player”

is used to refer to any such device.

Follow these instructions only after the media player is connected to an

access point. For information about settings and conguration, refer to the

documentation provided with the device.

1 Access the Wi-Fi menu.

●Follow step 2 of “Adding a Smartphone

Using the Wi-Fi Menu” (=

118) to

display the Wi-Fi menu.

2 Choose [ ].

●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn

the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then

press the [ ] button.

3 Establish a connection with an

access point.

●Connect to the access point as described

in steps 4 – 6 of “Using WPS-Compatible

Access Points” (=

120) or in steps 2 – 4

of “Connecting to Listed Access Points”

121).

127

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Printing Images Wirelessly from a

Connected Printer

Connect the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi to print as follows.

These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can

also use an existing access point (=

119).

1 Access the Wi-Fi menu.

●Access the Wi-Fi menu as described in

step 2 of “Adding a Smartphone Using

the Wi-Fi Menu” (=

118).

2 Choose [ ].

●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn

the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then

press the [ ] button.

3 Choose [Add a Device].

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [Add a Device], and then

press the [ ] button.

●The camera’s SSID is displayed.

●Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in

the camera.

●Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent

destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.

You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to

choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a

new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the

[][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.

●Media player connections will be displayed as “MediaServ.” in the

connection history.

●RAW images and movies are not displayed.

●Information overlay and details displayed on the TV set vary

depending on the media player. Depending on the media player,

image information may not be displayed, or vertical images may

be shown in horizontal orientation.

●Icons with labels such as “1-100” contain images grouped by le

number in the selected folder.

●Dates shown for cards or folders may reect the date on the

camera’s clock when the card or folder was last viewed.

128

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

●Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in

the camera.

●Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent

destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.

You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to

choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a

new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the

[][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.

●If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU

32) > [ 4] tab > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Target History] > [Off].

●To use another access point, follow the steps in “Using Another

Access Point” (=

119).

4 Connect the printer to the network.

●In the printer’s Wi-Fi setting menu,

choose the SSID (network name)

displayed on the camera to establish a

connection.

5 Choose the printer.

●Choose the printer name (either press the

[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and

then press the [ ] button.

6 Choose an image to print.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose an image.

●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ], and

press the [ ] button again.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [Print], and then press the

[ ] button.

●For detailed printing instructions, see

“Printing Images” (=

160).

●To end the connection, press the [ ]

button, choose [OK] on the conrmation

screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or

turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]

button.

129

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

4 Send an image.

●Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to

send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose

[Send this image], and then press the [ ]

button.

●Image transfer will begin. The screen

darkens during image transfer.

●[Transfer completed] is displayed after

the image is sent, and the image transfer

screen is displayed again.

●To end the connection, press the

[] button, choose [OK] on the

conrmation screen (either press the

[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and

then press the [ ] button.

●Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.

●Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent

destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.

You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to

choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a

new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the

[][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.

●If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU

32) > [ 4] tab > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Target History] > [Off].

●You can also send multiple images at once and change the image

size before sending (=

130).

Sending Images to Another

Camera

Connect two cameras via Wi-Fi and send images between them as

follows.

●Only Canon-brand cameras equipped with a Wi-Fi function can be

connected to wirelessly. Even Canon-brand cameras that support Eye-

Fi cards cannot be connected to if they do not have a Wi-Fi function.

You cannot connect to PowerShot SD430 DIGITAL ELPH WIRELESS/

DIGITAL IXUS WIRELESS cameras with this camera.

1 Access the Wi-Fi menu.

●Access the Wi-Fi menu as described in

step 2 of “Adding a Smartphone Using

the Wi-Fi Menu” (=

118).

2 Choose [ ].

●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn

the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then

press the [ ] button.

3 Choose [Add a Device].

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [Add a Device], and then

press the [ ] button.

●Follow steps 1 – 3 on the target camera

too.

●Camera connection information will be

added when [Start connection on target

camera] is displayed on both camera

screens.

130

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

●You can also choose images in step 2 by pressing the [ ] button

twice to access single-image display and then pressing the [ ][ ]

buttons or turning the [ ] dial.

Notes on Sending Images

●Keep your ngers or other objects off the Wi-Fi antenna area

3). Covering this may decrease the speed of your image

transfers.

●Depending on the condition of the network you are using, it may take

a long time to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera

battery level.

●Up to 50 images can be sent together at once. Only one movie can be

sent. However, Web services may limit the number of images or length

of movies you can send. For details, refer to the Web service you are

using.

●When sending movies to smartphones, note that the supported image

quality varies depending on the smartphone. For details, refer to the

smartphone user manual.

●On the screen, wireless signal strength is indicated by the following

icons.

[] high, [ ] medium, [ ] low, [ ] weak

●Sending images to Web services will take less time when resending

images you have already sent that are still on the CANON iMAGE

GATEWAY server.

Image Sending Options

You can choose multiple images to send at once and change the image

resolution (size) before sending. Some Web services also enable you to

annotate the images you send.

Sending Multiple Images

1 Choose [Select and send].

●On the image transfer screen, press the

[ ][ ] buttons to choose [Select and

send], and then press the [ ] button.

2 Choose images.

●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose

an image to send, and then press the [ ]

button to add a [ ] to the image.

●To cancel selection, press the [ ] button

again. [ ] is no longer displayed.

●Repeat this process to choose additional

images.

●After you nish choosing images, press

the [ ] button.

3 Send the images.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [Send], and then press the

[ ] button.

131

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Sending Images Automatically

(Image Sync)

Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can

be sent to a computer or Web services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.

Note that images cannot be sent only to Web services.

Initial Preparations

Preparing the Camera

1 Add [ ] as a destination.

●Add [ ] as a destination, as described in

“Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY”

123).

●When also choosing a Web service as a

destination for sending images, log in to

CANON iMAGE GATEWAY (=

124),

then choose your camera model,

access the Web service settings screen,

and under the Image Sync settings,

choose the Web service destination. For

details, refer to Help in CANON iMAGE

GATEWAY.

2 Choose the type of images to send

(only when sending movies with

images).

●Press the [ ] button and choose

[Wi-Fi Settings] on the [ 4] tab (=

32).

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose

[Image Sync], and then choose [Stills/

Movies] (=

32).

Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels

(Image Size)

On the image transfer screen, choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ]

buttons, and then press the [ ] button. On the screen displayed, choose

the recording pixel setting (image size) by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons,

and then press the [ ] button.

●To send images at original size, select [No] as the resizing option.

●Choosing [ ] or [ ] will resize images that are larger than the

selected size before sending.

●Movies cannot be resized.

Adding Comments

Using the camera, you can add comments to images that you send

to e-mail addresses, social networking services, etc. The number of

characters and symbols that can be entered may differ depending on the

Web service.

1 Access the screen for adding

comments.

●On the image transfer screen, choose

[ ] by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons,

and then press the [ ] button.

●On the image transfer screen, touch [ ].

2 Add a comment (=

33).

3 Send the image.

●When a comment is not entered, the comment set in CANON

iMAGE GATEWAY is automatically sent.

●You can also annotate multiple images before sending them. The

same comment is added to all images sent together.

132

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

1 Send images.

●Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Uploading Images

to Web Services” (=

125) to choose

[ ].

●Once the connection is established,

the images are sent. When the images

have been sent successfully to the

CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server, [ ] is

displayed on the screen.

2 Save the images to the computer.

●Images are automatically saved to the

computer when you turn it on.

●[] is displayed in the sent images.

●When sending images, you should use a fully charged battery

pack or an AC adapter kit (sold separately, =

148).

●Even if images were imported to the computer through a different

method, any images not yet sent to the computer from CANON

iMAGE GATEWAY will be sent to the computer.

●Sending is faster when the destination is a computer on the same

network as the camera, because images are sent via the access

point instead of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images

stored on a computer are sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, so

the computer must be connected to the Internet.

Preparing the Computer

Install and congure the software on the destination computer.

1 Install the software.

●Install the software on a computer

connected to the Internet (=

158).

2 Register the camera.

●Windows: In the taskbar, right-click [ ],

and then click [Add new camera].

●Mac OS: In the menu bar, click [ ], and

then click [Add new camera].

●A list of cameras linked to CANON

iMAGE GATEWAY is displayed. Choose

the camera from which images are to be

sent.

●Once the camera is registered and the

computer is ready to receive images, the

icon changes to [ ].

Sending Images

Images sent from the camera are automatically saved to the computer.

If the computer that you intend to send images to is turned off, the images

will be stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server.

Stored images are regularly erased, so make sure to turn on the computer

and save the images.

133

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

●Movie shooting is not available.

●It may take longer than usual to focus on the subject.

●Depending on the connection status, image display or shot timing

may be slower than usual.

●Any jerky subject motion shown on the smartphone due to the

connection environment will not affect recorded images.

●Captured images are not transferred to the smartphone. Use the

smartphone to browse and import images from the camera.

Shooting Remotely

As you check a shooting screen on your smartphone, you can use it to

shoot remotely.

●Privacy settings must be congured in advance to allow all

images (=

116, =

135).

1 Secure the camera.

●Keep the camera still by mounting it on a

tripod or taking other measures.

2 Connect the camera and

smartphone (=

116).

●In the privacy settings, choose [All

images].

3 Choose remote shooting.

●Choose remote shooting in EOS Remote

on the smartphone.

●Once the camera is ready for remote

shooting, a live image from the camera

will be displayed on the smartphone.

●At this time, a message is displayed on

the camera, and all operations except

pressing the power button or mode dial

are disabled.

4 Shoot.

●Use the smartphone to shoot.

134

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

4 Choose the item to edit.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose the item to edit, and then

press the [ ] button.

●The items you can change depend on the

device or service.

Congurable Items

Connection

Web

Services

Change Device Nickname

134)

O O O

– –

View Settings (=

135) –

– – –

Erase Connection Info (=

135)

O O O

– –

: Congurable – : Not congurable

Changing a Device Nickname

You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on

the camera.

●Following step 4 in “Editing Connection

Information” (=

134), choose [Change

Device Nickname] and press the [ ]

button.

●Select the input eld and press the [ ]

button. Use the keyboard displayed to

enter a new nickname (=

33).

Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings

Edit or erase Wi-Fi settings as follows.

Editing Connection Information

1 Access the Wi-Fi menu and choose

a device to edit.

●Press the [ ] button to turn the camera

on.

●Press the [ ] button.

●Access the device selection screen

(press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial), choose the icon of a device to edit

(press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn

the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]

button.

2 Choose [Edit a Device].

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [Edit a Device], and then

press the [ ] button.

3 Choose the device to edit.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose the device to edit, and then

press the [ ] button.

135

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

2 Select a share setting.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose a menu item.

●If selecting [All images] or [Images shot

today], press the [ ] button.

●If selecting [Images shot in past days],

press the [ ] button. In the screen that

appears, press the [ ][ ] buttons to

select the number of days, and then

press the [ ] button.

●If selecting [Select by rating], press the

[] button. In the screen that appears,

press the [ ][ ] buttons to select the

rating, and then press the [ ] button.

●If selecting [File number range], press the

[] button. In the screen that appears,

select the beginning and end of the le

number range, choose [OK], and then

press the [ ] button. Follow steps 2 – 3

in “Selecting a Range” (=

103) to dene

the range.

●Choose [All images] when shooting remotely.

Erasing Connection Information

Erase connection information (information about devices that you have

connected to) as follows.

●Following step 4 in “Editing Connection

Information” (=

134), choose [Erase

Connection Info] and press the [ ]

button.

●After [Erase?] is displayed, press the

[][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to

choose [OK], and then press the [ ]

button.

●The connection information will be

erased.

Specifying Images to Share with Smartphones

You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on

the camera.

Share setting Images shared with smartphone

All images All images stored on the card

Images shot today Images shot on the current day

Images shot in past

days

Images shot within a specied previous

number of days

Select by rating Images with the specied rating (=

108)

File number range Images within the specied range

This setting is also possible whenever the screen in step 2 is displayed

during the smartphone connection.

1 Access the setting screen.

●Follow step 4 in “Editing Connection

Information” (=

134), choose [View

Settings] and then press the [ ] button.

136

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default

Return the Wi-Fi settings to default if you transfer ownership of the

camera to another person, or dispose of it.

Resetting the Wi-Fi settings will also clear all Web service settings. Be

sure that you want to reset all Wi-Fi settings before using this option.

1 Choose [Wi-Fi Settings].

●Press the [ ] button and choose

[Wi-Fi Settings] on the [ 4] tab (=

32).

2 Choose [Reset Settings].

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [Reset Settings], and then

press the [ ] button.

3 Restore the default settings.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [OK], and then press the

[ ] button.

●The Wi-Fi settings are now reset.

●To reset other settings (aside from Wi-Fi) to defaults, choose

[Clear all camera settings] on the [ 4] tab (=

145).

137

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Adjusting Basic Camera Functions

MENU (=

32) functions on the [ 1], [ 2], [ 3] and [ 4] tabs can be

congured. Customize commonly used functions as desired, for greater

convenience.

Date-Based Image Storage

Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the

camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day.

●Choose [Create Folder] on the [ 1] tab

and then choose [Daily].

●Images will now be saved in folders

created on the shooting date.

File Numbering

Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001–9999)

and saved in folders that store up to 2000 images each. You can change

how the camera assigns le numbers.

●Choose [File Numbering] on the [ 1] tab

and then choose an option.

Continuous

Images are numbered consecutively (until the

9999th shot is taken/saved) even if you switch

memory cards.

Auto Reset Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch

memory cards, or when a new folder is created.

Set-Up Menu

Customize or adjust basic camera functions for greater convenience

138

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

●The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be

less than the advertised capacity.

Low-Level Formatting

Perform low-level formatting in the following cases: [Memory card error] is

displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing

is slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly

stops. Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before low-

level formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take

other steps to back them up.

●On the screen in step 2 of “Formatting

Memory Cards” (=

138), press the

[ ] button to place a [ ] by [Low

Level Format].

●Follow step 2 in “Formatting Memory

Cards” (=

138) to continue the

formatting process.

●Low-level formatting takes longer than “Formatting Memory

Cards” (=

138), because data is erased from all storage regions

of the memory card.

●You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing

[Cancel]. In this case, all data will be erased, but the memory card

can be used normally.

●Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be

numbered consecutively after the last number of existing images

on newly inserted memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001,

use an empty (or formatted (=

138)) memory card.

Formatting Memory Cards

Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device,

you should format the card with this camera.

Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy

images on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back

them up.

1 Access the [Format] screen.

●Choose [Format] on the [ 1] tab and then

press the [ ] button.

2 Choose [OK].

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [OK], and then press the

[ ] button.

●The card is now formatted.

●Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes le

management information on the card and does not erase the data

completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards,

take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by

physically destroying cards.

139

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Resetting the Electronic Level

Restore the electronic level to its original state as follows. Note that this is

not possible unless you have calibrated the electronic level.

●Choose [Electronic Level] on the [ 1] tab

and then press the [ ] button.

●Choose [Reset], and press the [ ]

button.

●Choose [OK], and then press the [ ]

button.

Using Eco Mode

This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode.

When the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce

battery consumption.

1 Congure the settings.

●Choose [Eco Mode] on the [ 2] tab and

then choose [On].

●[] is now shown on the shooting

screen (=

174).

●The screen darkens when the camera

is not used for approximately two

seconds; approximately ten seconds

after darkening, the screen turns off.

The camera turns off after approximately

three minutes of inactivity.

2 Shoot.

●To activate the screen and prepare for

shooting when the screen is off but the

(rear) indicator lamp is still on, press the

shutter button halfway.

Changing Video Formats

This lets you dene the image format for your TV set. This setting also

changes the image quality (frame rate) options available for movies.

●Choose [Video system] on the [ 1] tab

and then choose an option.

Electronic Level Calibration

Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you level the

camera.

For greater calibration accuracy, display grid lines (=

30) to help you

level the camera in advance.

1 Make sure the camera is level.

●Place the camera on a at surface, such

as a table.

2 Calibrate the electronic level.

●Choose [Electronic Level] on the [ 1] tab

and then press the [ ] button.

●To adjust left/right tilt, choose [Horizontal

Roll Calibration], and to adjust forward/

backward tilt, choose [Vertical Pitch

Calibration], followed by the [ ] button. A

conrmation message is displayed.

●Choose [OK], and then press the [ ]

button.

140

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Screen Brightness

Adjust screen brightness as follows.

●Choose [LCD Brightness] on the [ 2] tab

and press the [ ] button. Choose the

speed by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or

turning the [ ] dial.

●For maximum brightness, press and hold the [ ] button

for at least one second when the shooting screen is displayed

or when in single-image display. (This will override the [LCD

Brightness] setting on the [ 2] tab.) To restore the original

brightness, press and hold the [ ] button again for at least

one second or restart the camera.

Power-Saving Adjustment

Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto

Power Down and Display Off, respectively) as needed (=

28).

●Choose [Power Saving] on the [ 2] tab

and then press the [ ] button.

●Select an item and press the [ ] button.

Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to change the setting and then press

[ ] again.

●To conserve battery power, you should normally choose [On] for

[Auto Power Down] and [1 min.] or less for [Display Off].

●The [Display Off] setting is applied even if you set [Auto Power

Down] to [Off].

●These power-saving functions are not available when you have

set Eco Mode (=

139) to [On].

141

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Date and Time

Adjust the date and time as follows.

●Choose [Date/Time] on the [ 2] tab and

then press the [ ] button.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an

option, and then adjust the setting, either

by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning

the [ ] dial.

Display Language

Change the display language as needed.

●Choose [Language ] on the [ 2] tab

and then press the [ ] button.

●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn

the [ ] dial to choose a language, and

then press the [ ] button.

●You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by

pressing and holding the [ ] button and pressing the [ ]

button.

World Clock

To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when

you travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to

that time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the

Date/Time setting manually.

Before using the world clock, be sure to set the date and time and your

home time zone, as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (=

18).

1 Specify your destination.

●Choose [Time Zone] on the [ 2] tab and

then press the [ ] button.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [ World], and then press

the [ ] button.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the

destination.

●To set daylight saving time (1 hour

ahead), choose [ ] by pressing the

[ ][ ] buttons, and then choose [ ] by

pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.

●Press the [ ] button.

2 Switch to the destination time zone.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [ World], and then press

the [ ] button.

●[] is now shown on the shooting screen

174).

●Adjusting the date or time while in [ ] mode (=

19) will

automatically update your [ Home] time and date.

142

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

●Note the following precautions when operating the touch screen.

- Since the LCD monitor is not pressure-sensitive, do not use

any sharp objects such as your ngernail or a ballpoint pen, for

touch operations.

- Do not use wet ngers for touch screen operations.

- If the LCD monitor has any moisture or if your ngers are wet,

the touch screen may not respond or incorrect operation may

occur. In such a case, turn off the power and wipe the LCD

monitor with a cloth.

- Do not attach any protective sheet (commercially available) or

sticker on the LCD monitor. Doing so may reduce touch screen

responsiveness.

●The touch screen may not be as responsive in [Sensitive] mode

when performing successive touch operations.

Cleaning the Image Sensor

The camera has a cleaning function that automatically removes dust from

the image sensor when the power is turned on or off, or when the camera

shuts off in Power Saving mode. This cleaning function can be activated

whenever you like, or shut off entirely.

Turning Auto Cleaning Off

1 Access the setting screen.

● After turning the camera on in shooting

mode, choose [Sensor cleaning] on the

[ 3] tab and press the [ ] button.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [Auto cleaning ], and

then press the [ ] button.

Silencing Camera Operations

The camera can be silenced when you press the shutter button halfway or

trigger the self-timer.

●Choose [Beep] on the [ 3] tab and then

choose [Off].

Hiding Hints and Tips

Hints and tips are normally shown when you choose an option in the quick

setting menu (=

31) or shooting functions screen (=

61). If you

prefer, you can deactivate this information.

●Choose [Hints & Tips] on the [ 3] tab and

then choose [Off].

Changing Touch Screen Settings

The sensitivity of the touch screen can be changed to respond to a lighter

touch, or not respond to touch at all.

●Choose [Touch Operation] on the [ 3] tab

and then choose the desired setting.

●Choose [Sensitive] to boost touch screen

sensitivity, or choose [Disable] to turn

touch screen control off.

143

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

●For the most effective cleaning results, place the camera upright

on a desk or other surface before cleaning.

●Repeated consecutive sensor cleanings will not produce notably

better results. [Clean now ] may not be available for selection

immediately after cleaning.

●If there is dust or any other material on the image sensor that

the cleaning function cannot remove, contact a Canon Customer

Support Help Desk.

Cleaning Manually

If there is dust or dirt on the image sensor that the cleaner cannot remove,

try to clean it manually using a commercial blower or other device.

The image sensor is an extremely delicate component. If manual cleaning

is required, consulting with the Canon Service Center (listed in the

appendix) is strongly recommended.

1 Turn the camera off.

2 Detach the lens.

3 Clean the image sensor.

●The image sensor is an extremely delicate component. Exercise

care when cleaning.

●Do not use a blower equipped with a brush. Brushes can damage

the image sensor upon contact.

●Do not insert the blower into the lens mount surface. This can

damage the shutter.

●Do not clean with high-pressure air or gas. High-pressure airow

can damage the image sensor, and condensing or freezing gas

can damage the image sensor surface.

●If the blower still fails to clean the image sensor, having the

sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.

2 Congure the settings.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [Disable], and then press

the [ ] button.

Activating the Cleaner

1 Access the setting screen.

●After turning the camera on in shooting

mode, choose [Sensor cleaning] on the

[ 3] tab and press the [ ] button.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [Clean now ], and then

press the [ ] button.

2 Clean the sensor.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [OK], and then press the

[ ] button.

●The screen will indicate that the sensor

is being cleaned. Although there will be a

shutter sound, a picture is not taken.

●The sensor cleaning also works while no lens is attached. If no

lens is attached, do not insert your nger or blower tip beyond the

lens mount. This is to prevent damage to the shutter curtains.

144

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

●To check the information entered, choose [Display Copyright Info]

on the screen above, and then press the [ ] button.

●You can also use the EOS Utility software (=

158) to enter,

change, and delete copyright information. Some characters

entered with the software may not display on the camera, but will

be correctly recorded in images.

●You can check copyright information recorded in images using the

software once you save the images to a computer.

Deleting All Copyright Information

You can delete both the author’s name and copyright details at the same

time as follows.

●Follow the steps in “Setting Copyright

Information to Record in Images”

144) and choose [Delete Copyright

Info].

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [OK], and then press the

[ ] button.

●The copyright info already recorded in images will not be deleted.

Checking Certication Logos

Some logos for certication requirements met by the camera can be

viewed on the screen. Other certication logos are printed in this guide, on

the camera packaging, or on the camera body.

●Choose [Certication Logo Display]

on the [ 4] tab and then press the [ ]

button.

Setting Copyright Information to Record in

Images

To record the author’s name and copyright details in images, set this

information beforehand as follows.

●Choose [Copyright Info] on the [ 4] tab

and then press the [ ] button.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [Enter Author’s Name] or

[Enter Copyright Details]. Press the [ ]

button to access the keyboard, and enter

the name (=

33).

●Press the [ ] button, and [Accept

changes?] is displayed. Press the [ ][ ]

buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose

[Yes], and then press the [ ] button.

●The information set here will now be

recorded in images.

145

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

●The following functions are not restored to default settings.

- [Video system] on the [ 1] tab (=

139)

- [Time Zone] (=

141), [Date/Time] (=

141), and [Language

] (=

141) on the [ 2] tab

- [External ash func. setting] or [External ash C.Fn setting] in

[Flash Control] on the [ 3] tab

- The [ 1] tab

- Exposure compensation (=

61) settings

- Shooting mode (=

51)

- Wi-Fi settings (=

115)

- Calibrated value for the electronic level (=

139)

- Copyright information (=

144)

Adjusting Other Settings

The following functions are also available for use.

●[Wi-Fi Settings] ([ 4] tab) (=

115)

●[Custom shooting mode (C)] ([ 4] tab) (=

90)

●[ rmware ver.: *.*.*] ([ 4] tab) (used for updating the rmware)

●During rmware updates, the touch screen will be disabled to

prevent accidental operations.

Restoring Defaults

If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera

settings.

1 Access the [Clear all camera

settings] screen.

●Choose [Clear all camera settings] on the

[ 4] tab and then press the [ ] button.

2 Restore default settings.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [OK], and then press the

[ ] button.

●Default settings are now restored.

146

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.

This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used

with genuine Canon accessories.

Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents

such as re, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon

accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please

note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the

malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories, although you may request

such repairs on a chargeable basis.

Accessories

Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon accessories and

other compatible accessories sold separately

147

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

System Map

*1 Depending on the lens attached, use of the Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3

(sold separately) may be necessary.

*2 Also available for purchase separately.

90EX

USB port

Card slot

Remote

Controller

RC-6

Electronic Viewnder

EVF-DC1

ST-E3-RT

430EX II

600EX-RT

600EX

320EX

270EX II

Macro Twin Lite

MT-24EX

Macro Ring Lite

MR-14EX II

MR-14EX

ST-E2

IFC-400PCU*2

TV set/Video

Computer

PictBridge-compatible printer

Card reader

SD/SDHC/SDXC

memory card

External microphone

EF lenses

EF-S lenses

EF-M lenses

Mount Adapter

EF-EOS M

AC Adapter Kit

ACK-E17

Accessories

Battery Charger

LC-E17/LC-E17E*

Battery Pack

LP-E17*

Body Jacket

EH27-CJ

Neck Strap

EM-E2

Neck Strap

EM-200DB*

HDMI Cable

HTC-100

148

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

●The message [Battery communication error] is displayed if you

use a non-genuine Canon battery pack, and user response is

required. Note that Canon shall not be liable for any damages

resulting from accidents, such as malfunction or re, that occur

due to use of non-genuine Canon battery packs.

●The battery pack includes a convenient cover which you can

attach so that is visible on a charged battery pack, and attach

it so that is not visible on an uncharged battery pack.

AC Adapter Kit ACK-E17

●For powering the camera using

household power. Recommended when

using the camera over extended periods,

or when connecting the camera to a

printer or computer. Cannot be used to

charge the battery pack in the camera.

●The battery charger and AC adapter kit can be used in areas with

100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz).

●For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially

available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer

designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack.

Optional Accessories

The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that

availability varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be

available.

Lens

EF-M lenses, EF lenses, EF-S lenses

●Pick from a variety of lenses to support whatever target or expression

you want. The Mount Adapter EF-EOS M is required to attach EF and

EF-S lenses.

Mount Adapter EF-EOS M

●Use this mounting adapter to attach EF or

EF-S lenses to your camera.

Power Supplies

Battery Pack LP-E17

●Rechargeable lithium-ion battery.

Battery Charger LC-E17/LC-E17E

●Charger for Battery Pack LP-E17

149

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3

●Connection cord for using Speedlite away

from camera.

Other Accessories

Electronic Viewnder EVF-DC1

●Makes it easier to get the shot you’re

looking for.

Remote Controller RC-6

●Enables you to re a xed camera from

a distance.

Body Jacket EH27-CJ

●Protects the camera from dust and

scratches.

Neck Strap EM-E2

●Strap made from the same material as

Body Jacket EH27-CJ.

Flash

Speedlite 600EX-RT/600EX/430EX II/

320EX/270EX II/90EX

●Shoe-mounted ash unit that enables

many styles of ash photography.

Speedlite 580EX II, 580EX, 550EX,

430EX, 420EX, 380EX, 270EX, and

220EX are also supported.

Speedlite Transmitter ST-E3-RT/ST-E2

●Enables wireless control of slave

Speedlite ash units (except Speedlite

220EX/270EX).

●Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3 may be

required when using ST-E2 with certain

lenses.

Macro Twin Lite MT-24EX

Macro Ring Lite MR-14EX II/MR-14EX

●External macro ash unit that enables

many styles of macro ash photography.

150

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Using Optional Accessories

Still Images Movies

Playback on a TV

Still Images Movies

Connecting the camera to an HDTV with the HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold

separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of the

TV. Movies shot at an image quality of [ ], [ ], [ ],

[ ], or [ ] can be viewed in high denition.

For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual.

1 Make sure the camera and TV are

off.

2 Connect the camera to the TV.

●On the TV, insert the cable plug fully into

the HDMI input as shown.

●On the camera, open the terminal cover

and insert the cable plug fully into the

camera terminal.

Interface Cable IFC-400PCU

●For connecting the camera to a computer

or printer.

●IFC-200U and IFC-500U are also

compatible.

HDMI Cable HTC-100

●For connecting the camera to an HDMI

input of a high-denition TV.

Printers

Canon-Brand PictBridge-Compatible

Printers

●Even without using a computer, you can

print images by connecting the camera

directly to a printer.

For details, visit your nearest Canon

retailer.

151

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Powering the Camera with Household Power

Still Images Movies

Powering the camera with AC Adapter Kit ACK-E17 (sold separately)

eliminates the need to monitor the remaining battery level.

1 Make sure the camera is off.

2 Insert the coupler.

●Follow step 1 in “Inserting the Battery

Pack and Memory Card” (=

17) to

open the cover.

●Holding the coupler with the terminals (1)

facing as shown, insert the coupler just

as you would a battery pack (following

step 2 in “Inserting the Battery Pack and

Memory Card” (=

17)).

●Follow step 4 in “Inserting the Battery

Pack and Memory Card” (=

18) to

close the cover.

3 Connect the adapter to the coupler.

●Open the cover and insert the adapter

plug fully into the coupler.

4 Connect the power cord.

●Insert one end of the power cord into the

compact power adapter, and then plug

the other end into a power outlet.

●Turn the camera on and use it as desired.

●When nished, turn the camera off and

unplug the power cord from the outlet.

3 Turn the TV on and switch to

external input.

●Switch the TV input to the external input

you connected the cable to in step 2.

4 Turn the camera on.

●Press the [ ] button to turn the camera

on.

●Images from the camera are now

displayed on the TV. (Nothing is

displayed on the camera screen.)

●When nished, turn off the camera and

TV before disconnecting the cable.

●Touch-screen operations are not supported while the camera is

connected to a television.

●When the camera and TV are connected, you can also shoot

while previewing shots on the larger screen of the TV. To shoot,

follow the same steps as when using the camera screen.

However, magnifying images (=

100) is not available.

152

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Using the Hot Shoe

The hot shoe is used to attach electronic viewnders and external ashes

(sold separately).

1 Remove the hot shoe cap.

●Pull the cap out in the direction of the

arrow.

●To avoid losing the cap, place it in the

case for your electronic viewnder or

external ash.

2 Attach the hot shoe cap.

●After removing the external ash or

viewnder, reattach the cap to protect the

hot shoe.

●Insert the cap in the direction of the

arrow.

●Do not raise the internal ash when an accessory besides the

Electronic Viewnder EVF-DC1 is attached to the hot shoe. The

ash may strike the accessory. The ash will not re at this time.

●Do not open the LCD monitor upward when an accessory like an

electronic viewnder or external ash is attached to the hot shoe.

The monitor may strike the viewnder or ash.

●Do not disconnect the adapter or unplug the power cord while

the camera is still on. This may erase your shots or damage the

camera.

●Do not attach the adapter or adapter cord to other objects. Doing

so could result in malfunction or damage to the product.

Remote Control Shooting

Use Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately) to shoot pictures up to

approx. 5 meters (16 ft.) from the front of the camera.

●Follow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”

40) and choose [ ].

●Point the Remote Controller toward the

camera’s remote control sensor and

press the transmit button to shoot.

●The picture is not taken until focus is achieved.

●Fluorescent or LED lighting may cause incorrect operation of the

camera by triggering the shutter inadvertently. Try to keep the

camera away from such light sources.

●If you point a remote controller for a TV set toward the camera

and operate it, it may cause incorrect operation of the camera by

triggering the shutter inadvertently.

●The Remote Controller can also be used for shooting movies

58).

153

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

4 Turn on the camera and switch to

the camera or electronic viewnder

display.

●Bring your eye up to the electronic

viewnder, and the camera’s screen will

shut off.

●Remove your eye, and the camera will

shut off the nder display and turn the

camera screen back on.

5 Adjust the view.

●Turn the dial until you can see the display

of the electronic viewnder clearly.

6 Remove from the camera.

●Once you are done, turn off the camera

and hold down the [UNLOCK] button of

the electronic viewnder as you remove

it.

●Remove the electronic viewnder from

the camera and store in a safe place

when not in use.

●The electronic viewnder and camera screen displays cannot be

active at the same time.

●Camera touch screen control is not available in electronic

viewnder display mode.

Using Electronic Viewnders (Sold Separately)

Still Images Movies

Use an electronic viewnder (sold separately) to keep closer track of your

subject and make it easier to shoot.

When using an electronic viewnder, shooting time and number of

pictures are reduced compared to using the camera’s rear screen (LCD

monitor).

1 Make sure the camera is off.

2 Attach the electronic viewnder to

the hot shoe.

●Remove the cover of the electronic

viewnder.

●Insert the electronic viewnder into the

hot shoe (=

152) in the direction shown

until it clicks into place.

3 Adjust the angle of the electronic

viewnder.

●Adjust the angle of the electronic

viewnder by up to approximately 90

degrees, as needed for your scene or

target.

154

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Using an External Flash (Sold Separately)

Still Images Movies

More sophisticated ash photography is possible with an optional

Speedlite EX series ash. For movie shooting using an LED light, the

optional Speedlite 320EX ash is available.

●Non-EX series Canon ash units may not re correctly or may not

re at all, in some cases.

●Use of non-Canon ash units (especially high-voltage ash units)

or ash accessories may prevent normal camera operation and

may damage the camera.

●Also refer to the Speedlite EX series manual for additional

information. This camera is a Type-A camera that can use all the

features of EXseries Speedlites.

1 Attach the ash.

●Make sure the camera is off before

attaching the ash.

2 Turn the ash on, and then turn the

camera on.

●An orange [ ] icon is now displayed.

●The ash pilot lamp will light up when the

ash is ready.

●Although the electronic viewnder is produced under extremely

high-precision manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of

the pixels meet design specications, in rare cases some pixels

may be defective or may appear as red or black dots. This is not a

malfunction. They do not affect the images recorded.

●Vertical or horizontal black bars may be displayed depending on

the selected aspect ratio (=

45). The black bars indicate image

areas not recorded.

●Press the [ ] button on the electronic viewnder to change the

screen displayed.

●In the menu (=

32), set the [Display Control] option on the

[1] tab to [Manual] to keep the camera screen from turning on

even when you remove your eye from the viewnder. Press the

[] button on the electronic viewnder to bring up the camera

display in this mode.

●Using the electronic viewnder in [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and

[] modes will result in a smoother display in both the viewnder

and camera screen. In the menu (=

32), set the [Display

Mode] option on the [ 1] tab to [Power Saving] to return to the

normal display and conserve battery power.

●If the Wi-Fi (=

115) or keyboard screen (=

33) displays are

brought up in electronic viewnder mode, the display will switch

back to the camera screen.

●Different brightness settings (=

140) can be dened for the

electronic viewnder and camera screens.

155

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Setting External Flash Functions

When an external ash is attached, go to [Flash Control] on the [ 3] tab

of the menu (=

32) to adjust the following settings:

●Flash Firing (=

75)

●E-TTL II Metering (=

77)

●Red-eye Reduction (=

47)

●External Flash Function Settings (=

155)

●External Flash Custom Function Settings (=

156)

●Reset (=

157)

●Choose [External ash func. setting], and

press the [ ] button to display the screen

on the left.

●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose

an option and press the [ ] button or turn

the [ ] dial. On the next screen, press

the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to

choose a setting, and then press the [ ]

button to adjust it.

Option Description

Flash Mode

You can select the ash mode to suit your

desired ash shooting.

●[E-TTL II ash metering] is the standard

mode of EX-series Speedlites for automatic

ash shooting.

●The [Manual ash] mode is for setting the

Speedlite’s [Flash output level] yourself.

●For information on other ash modes, refer to

a compatible Speedlite’s instruction manual.

Wireless Func.

Wireless (multiple) ash shooting is available.

When shooting with multiple ashes, you can

also set up the radio channel, optical channel,

and master ash ring. For details on wireless

ash, refer to the instruction manual of the

Speedlite compatible with wireless ash.

3 Choose shooting mode [ ], [ ],

[ ], or [ ].

●Flash settings can only be congured in

these modes. In other modes, the ash

is adjusted and red automatically as

needed.

4 Congure the external ash.

155)

●Keep cords (from the macro ring lite or macro twin lite, as well as

the off-camera shoe cord) away from ash heads.

●When using a tripod, adjust the position of the legs to prevent the

ash heads from coming into contact with the legs.

●Depending on the position where you have attached the ash

controller, it may come into contact with the LCD monitor. To

prevent this, adjust the position of attachment or the orientation of

the controller, or adjust the angle of the monitor.

●Settings for the built-in ash cannot be congured while a

Speedlite EX series ash is attached, because that setting screen

is no longer accessible.

●You can also access the setting screen by pressing the [ ] button

for at least one second.

●320EX only: Auto LED lighting is only available in low-light movie

recording or in Movie mode. In this case, the [ ] icon is shown.

●The AF-assist beam on the external ash will not re. If using

Speedlite 320EX (sold separately), the LED light may turn on to

serve as an AF-assist beam.

156

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Option Description

Ratio control Dene the ash output level when using wireless

(multi-ash) shooting or the MR-14EX II.

●The [Built-in ash settings] screen cannot be accessed when an

external ash is attached.

●On the screen, the settable functions and the display will differ

depending on the Speedlite, current ash mode, ash Custom

Function settings, etc. For details on your Speedlite’s ash

functions, refer to the instruction manual of the Speedlite (sold

separately).

●With an EX-series Speedlite not compatible with ash function

settings, only [Flash Exp. Comp] can be adjusted. ([Shutter

synchronization] can also be set with certain EX-series

Speedlites.)

Setting External Flash Custom Functions

For details on the Speedlite’s Custom Functions, refer to the instruction

manual of the Speedlite (sold separately).

●Press the [ ] button, select

[External ash C.Fn setting] (within [Flash

Control] on the [ 3] tab), and then press

the [ ] button.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to select an option, and then press

the [ ] button. On the next screen, press

the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to

choose a setting, and then press the [ ]

button to adjust it.

●Set [Flash metering mode] to [1:TTL] (automatic ash metering)

in [External ash C.Fn setting] to fully re the ash when shooting.

Option Description

Flash zoom

(Flash coverage)

With Speedlites that have a zooming ash head,

you can set the ash coverage. Normally, set this

to [AUTO] so that the camera will automatically

set the ash coverage to match the lens focal

length.

Shutter

synchronization

Change the timing of the ash and shutter

release as follows.

●[] will re the ash immediately after the

shutter opens.

●[] will re the ash immediately before

the second curtain closes. If the shutter

speed is 1/100 second or faster, rst-curtain

synchronization will be used automatically

even if [Second-curtain synchronization] is

set.

●[] allows you to use the ash at all shutter

speeds. This is especially effective for

portraits using ll ash when you want to give

priority to the aperture setting.

Flash Exp. Comp

This allows you to adjust exposure

compensation when the ash res. For details,

refer to the instruction manual for the ash. If

ash exposure compensation is dened on the

Speedlite, you cannot set it on the camera side.

If it is dened on both the camera and ash, the

ash’s setting overrides the camera’s.

Flash output

level

Dene the power output of the ash. For details,

refer to the instruction manual for the ash. If it is

dened on both the camera and ash, the ash

setting overrides the camera setting.

Flash exposure

bracketing

Activates FEB (Flash Exposure Bracketing),

taking three shots while automatically changing

the ash output. For details, refer to the

instruction manual of your FEB-compatible ash.

Flash count,

Flash frequency

Denes the ash count and frequency when

[Flash Mode] is set to [MULTI].

157

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

●Settings will apply to external microphones as well when the

attenuator is enabled (=

59).

●When using an external microphone, [Wind Filter] (=

59) is

always set to [Off].

Resetting External Flash Functions

You can reset the options in the [External ash func. setting] and [External

ash C.Fn setting] screens to their defaults.

●Press the [ ] button, select [Clear

settings] (within [Flash Control] on the

[ 3] tab), and press the [ ] button.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons, or turn the [ ]

dial to select an option, and then press

the [ ] button. On the next screen, press

the [ ][ ] buttons, or turn the [ ] dial

to choose [OK], and then press the [ ]

button.

●[Clear built-in ash set.] cannot be accessed when an external

ash is attached.

Using External Microphones

Still Images Movies

Connect a commercially available microphone equipped with a mini

plug (3.5 mm diameter) to the camera’s external microphone IN terminal

3). Sound will be recorded with the external microphone. The

internal microphones will not be used when an external microphone is

connected.

●Open the cover and connect the external

microphone.

158

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Checking Your Computer Environment

The software can be used on the following computers. For detailed

system requirements and compatibility information, including support in

new operating systems, visit the Canon website.

Operating

System

Windows Mac OS

Windows 8/8.1

Windows 7 SP1

Mac OS X 10.9

Mac OS X 10.8

●Check the Canon website for the latest system requirements,

including supported OS versions.

Installing the Software

1 Download the software.

●Using a computer connected to the

Internet, go to “http://www.canon.com/

icpd/”.

●Access the site for your country or region.

●Download the software.

2 Click on [Easy Installation] and

follow the on-screen instructions.

●Double-click on the downloaded le, and

then click on [Easy Installation].

●Follow the on-screen instructions to

complete the installation process.

●Installation may take some time,

depending on computer performance and

the Internet connection.

●Click [Finish] or [Restart] on the screen

after installation.

Using the Software

The software available for download from the Canon website is introduced

below, with instructions for installation and saving images to a computer.

Software

After downloading the software from the Canon website and installing it,

you can do the following things on your computer.

●EOS Utility

- Import images and change camera settings

●Digital Photo Professional

- Browse, process and edit RAW images

●Picture Style Editor

- Edit Picture Styles and create and save original Picture Style les

●Image Transfer Utility

- Set up Image Sync (=

131) and receive images

●To view or edit movies on your computer, use software that

supports the movies shot with your camera (i.e. software installed

as standard on your computer or software that is generally

available).

Software Instruction Manual

Download software instruction manuals from the Canon website.

●Using a computer connected to the

Internet, go to “http://www.canon.com/

icpd/”.

●Access the site for your country or region.

159

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

3 Import images.

●Click on [Download images to computer],

then [Start automatic download].

●Images will be loaded into the computer

and saved to the Pictures folder, in

separate folders named by date. Digital

Photo Professional will then start up

automatically and display the loaded

images.

●After the image-loading process is

complete, close EOS Utility, press the

[] button to turn the camera off, and

unplug the cable.

●To view images loaded into your

computer, use Digital Photo Professional;

to view movies imported onto your

computer, use software that supports

the movies shot with your camera (i.e.

software installed as standard on your

computer or software that is generally

available).

Saving Images to a Computer

Use an interface cable (=

2) to connect your camera and save

images to a personal computer.

Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.8 are used here for the sake of illustration.

1 Connect the camera to the

computer.

●With the camera turned off, open the

cover (1). With the smaller plug of the

cable in the orientation shown, insert the

plug fully into the camera terminal (2).

●Insert the larger plug of the cable into the

computer’s USB port. For details about

USB connections on the computer, refer

to the computer user manual.

2 Turn on the camera and bring up

EOS Utility.

●Press the [ ] button to turn the camera

on.

●On Windows, double-click on the EOS

Utility icon on the desktop.

●On Mac OS, click on the EOS Utility icon

in the Dock (the bar at the bottom of the

desktop screen).

●On subsequent connections, EOS Utility

will start up automatically when you

connect the camera to the computer and

turn on the camera.

160

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Printing Images

Still Images Movies

Your shots can easily be printed by connecting the camera to a printer.

On the camera, you can specify images to set up batch printing, prepare

orders for photo development services, and prepare orders or print

images for photobooks.

A Canon SELPHY CP series compact photo printer is used here for the

sake of illustration. Screens displayed and available functions vary by

printer. Also refer to the printer manual for additional information.

Easy Print

Still Images Movies

Easily print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-

compatible printer (sold separately) with an interface cable (=

2).

1 Make sure the camera and printer

are off.

2 Connect the camera to the printer.

●Open the terminal cover. Holding the

smaller cable plug in the orientation

shown, insert the plug fully into the

camera terminal.

●Connect the larger cable plug to the

printer. For other connection details, refer

to the printer manual.

●The rst time you connect the camera to the computer, drivers will

be installed, so it may take a few minutes until camera images are

accessible.

●Although you can save images to a computer simply by

connecting your camera to the computer without using the

software, the following limitations apply.

- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the

computer until camera images are accessible.

- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal

orientation.

- RAW images (or JPEG images recorded with RAW images)

may not be saved.

- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved

to a computer.

- Some problems may occur when saving images or image

information, depending on the operating system version, the

software in use, or image le sizes.

161

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Conguring Print Settings

Still Images Movies

1 Access the printing screen.

●Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”

160) to access this screen.

2 Congure the settings.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to select an option. Press the [ ]

button, and on the next screen, press

the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to

adjust the option. Press the [ ] button to

return to the print screen.

Default Matches current printer settings.

Date Prints images with the date added.

File No. Prints images with the le number added.

Both Prints images with both the date and le

number added.

Off –

Default Matches current printer settings.

Off –

On Uses information from the time of shooting

to print under optimal settings.

Red-Eye 1 Corrects red-eye.

Copies Choose the number of copies to print.

Cropping –Specify a desired image area to print

162).

Paper

Settings –Specify the paper size, layout, and other

details (=

162).

3 Turn the printer on.

4 Turn the camera on.

●Press the [ ] button to turn the camera

on.

5 Choose an image.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose an image.

6 Access the printing screen.

●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ], and

press the [ ] button again.

7 Print the image.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [Print], and then press the

[ ] button.

●Printing now begins.

●To print other images, repeat the above

procedures starting from step 5 after

printing is nished.

●When you are nished printing, turn the

camera and printer off and disconnect

the cable.

●For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately),

see “Printers” (=

150).

162

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing

Still Images Movies

1 Choose [Paper Settings].

●After following step 1 in “Conguring Print

Settings” (=

161) to access the printing

screen, choose [Paper Settings] and

press the [ ] button.

2 Choose a paper size.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose an option, and then press

the [ ] button.

3 Choose a type of paper.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose an option, and then press

the [ ] button.

4 Choose a layout.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose an option, and then press

the [ ] button.

●When choosing [N-up], press the [ ]

button. On the next screen, press the

[ ][ ] buttons, or turn the [ ] dial to

choose the number of images to print,

and then press the [ ] button.

5 Print the image.

Cropping Images before Printing

Still Images Movies

By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area

instead of the entire image.

1 Choose [Cropping].

●After following step 1 in “Conguring Print

Settings” (=

161) to access the printing

screen, choose [Cropping] and press the

[ ] button.

●A cropping frame is now displayed,

indicating the image area to print.

2 Adjust the cropping frame as

needed.

●To resize the frame, press the [ ] or [ ]

button or turn the [ ] dial.

●To move the frame, press the

[][ ][ ][ ] buttons.

●To rotate the frame, press the [ ]

button.

●When nished, press the [ ] button.

3 Print the image.

●Follow step 7 in “Easy Print” (=

160)

to print.

●Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some

aspect ratios.

163

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

4 Print the image.

Printing Movie Scenes

Still Images Movies

1 Access the printing screen.

●Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”

160) to choose a movie. This screen

is displayed.

2 Choose a printing method.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ].

Press the [ ] button, and on the next

screen, press the [ ][ ] buttons or

turn the [ ] dial to choose the printing

method, and then press the [ ] button to

return to the print screen.

3 Print the image.

Movie Printing Options

Single Prints the current scene as a still image.

Sequence

Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on

a single sheet of paper. You can also print the folder

number, le number, and elapsed time for the frame by

setting [Caption] to [On].

Available Layout Options

Default Matches current printer settings.

Bordered Prints with blank space around the image.

Borderless Borderless, edge-to-edge printing.

N-up Choose how many images to print per sheet.

ID Photo

Prints images for identication purposes.

Only available for images with a recording pixel setting of

L and an aspect ratio of 3:2.

Fixed Size Choose the print size.

Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints.

Printing ID Photos

Still Images Movies

1 Choose [ID Photo].

●Following steps 1 – 4 in “Choosing

Paper Size and Layout before Printing”

162), choose [ID Photo] and press

the [ ] button.

2 Choose the long and short side

length.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose an option. Press the [ ]

button, and on the next screen, press

the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial

to choose the length, and then press the

[ ].

3 Choose the printing area.

●In step 2, press the [ ][ ] buttons or

turn the [ ] dial to choose [Cropping].

●Follow step 2 in “Cropping Images before

Printing” (=

162) to choose the printing

area.

164

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Print Type

Standard One image is printed per sheet.

Index Smaller versions of multiple images are

printed per sheet.

Both Both standard and index formats are

printed.

Date On Images are printed with the shooting date.

Off –

File No. On Images are printed with the le number.

Off –

Clear

DPOF data

On All image print list settings are cleared

after printing.

Off –

●Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the

printer or photo development service, in some cases.

●[] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the

memory card has print settings that were congured on another

camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may

overwrite all previous settings.

●Setting [Date] to [On] may cause some printers to print the date

twice.

●Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both

[Date] and [File No.] at the same time.

●Index printing is not available on some Canon-brand PictBridge-

compatible printers (sold separately).

●The date is printed in a format matching the setting details in

[Date/Time] on the [ 2] tab (=

18) of the menu (=

32).

●To cancel printing in progress, press the [ ] button, choose [OK],

and then press the [ ] button again.

●[ID Photo] and [Sequence] cannot be chosen on Canon-brand

PictBridge-compatible printers from CP720/CP730 and earlier

models.

Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)

Still Images Movies

Batch printing (=

166) and ordering prints from a photo development

service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a

memory card and congure relevant settings, such as the number of

copies, as follows. The printing information you prepare this way will

conform to DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standards.

●RAW images cannot be included in print list.

Conguring Print Settings

Still Images Movies

Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or le number, and

other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the print

list.

●Press the [ ] button, choose [Print

settings] on the [ 2] tab, and then press

the [ ] button.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the

[ ] dial to choose [Print Settings]. Press

the [ ] button, and on the next screen,

adjust the desired settings (=

32).

165

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images

Still Images Movies

●Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing

for Individual Images” (=

165), choose

[Select Range] and press the [ ] button.

●Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”

103) to specify images.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose

[Order], and then press the [ ] button.

Setting Up Printing for All Images

Still Images Movies

●Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing

for Individual Images” (=

165), choose

[Select All Images] and press the [ ]

button.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [OK], and then press the

[ ] button.

Clearing All Images from the Print List

●Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing

for Individual Images” (=

165), choose

[Clear All Selections] and press the [ ]

button.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [OK], and then press the

[ ] button.

Setting Up Printing for Individual Images

Still Images Movies

1 Choose [Select Images & Qty.].

●Press the [ ] button, choose [Print

settings] on the [ 2] tab, and then press

the [ ] button.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [Select Images & Qty.],

and then press the [ ] button (=

32).

2 Choose an image.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose an image, and then press

the [ ] button.

●You can now specify the number of

copies.

●If you specify index printing for the

image, it is labeled with a [ ] icon. To

cancel index printing for the image, press

the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer

displayed.

3 Specify the number of prints.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to specify the number of prints (up

to 99).

●To set up printing for other images and

specify the number of prints, repeat steps

2 – 3.

●Printing quantity cannot be specied for

index prints. You can only choose which

images to print, by following step 2.

●When nished, press the [ ] button

to return to the menu screen.

166

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Adding Images Individually

Still Images Movies

1 Choose [Select].

●Following the procedure in “Choosing

a Selection Method” (=

166), choose

[Select] and press the [ ] button.

2 Choose an image.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose an image, and then press

the [ ] button.

●[] is displayed.

●To remove the image from the photobook,

press the [ ] button again. [ ] is no

longer displayed.

●Repeat this process to specify other

images.

●When nished, press the [ ] button

to return to the menu screen.

Adding All Images to a Photobook

Still Images Movies

●Following the procedure in “Choosing

a Selection Method” (=

166), choose

[Select All Images] and press the [ ]

button.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [OK], and then press the

[ ] button.

Adding Images to a Photobook

Still Images Movies

Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images

on a memory card and importing them into the software on your computer,

where they are stored in their own folder. This is convenient when

ordering printed photobooks online or printing photobooks with your own

printer.

Choosing a Selection Method

●Press the [ ] button, choose

[Photobook Set-up] on the [ 2] tab, and

then choose how you will select images.

●[ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the

memory card has print settings that were congured on another

camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may

overwrite all previous settings.

167

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Removing All Images from a Photobook

Still Images Movies

●Following the procedure in “Choosing

a Selection Method” (=

166), choose

[Clear All Selections] and press the [ ]

button.

●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]

dial to choose [OK], and then press the

[ ] button.

168

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Troubleshooting

If you think there is a problem with the camera, rst check the following.

If the items below do not solve your problem, contact a Canon Customer

Support Help Desk.

Power

Nothing happens when the power button is pressed.

●Conrm that the battery pack is charged (=

16).

●Conrm that the battery pack is inserted facing the correct way (=

17).

●Conrm that the memory card/battery cover is fully closed (=

17).

●Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals

with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.

The battery pack runs out of power quickly.

●Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery

pack a little by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring that the terminals

do not touch any metal objects.

●Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals

with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.

●If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power soon

after charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery pack.

The battery pack is swollen.

●Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if

battery swelling prevents the battery pack from tting in the camera, contact a

Canon Customer Support Help Desk.

A sound is heard when turning the camera on or off with an EF-M lens

attached.

●When you turn off the camera, the lens aperture makes a small sound as it stops

down to prevent light from entering the camera. This is to protect the camera’s

internal components.

Appendix

Helpful information when using the camera

169

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Shots are blurry.

●Blurring may occur more often when touch shutter is used to shoot, depending on

shooting conditions. Hold the camera still when shooting.

The AF frame is displayed in orange, and the camera does not focus

when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

●To display AF frames in green and focus the camera correctly, try composing the

shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered before you press the shutter

button halfway. Otherwise, try pressing the shutter button halfway repeatedly.

Subjects in shots look too dark.

●Raise the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (=

75).

●Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (=

61).

●Correct it with the Auto Lighting Optimizer (=

64).

●Use AE lock or spot metering (=

61, =

62).

Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out.

●Lower the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (=

36).

●Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (=

61).

●Shoot with the AE lock or spot metering (=

61, =

62).

●Reduce the lighting on subjects.

Shots look too dark despite the ash ring (=

38).

●Shoot within ash range (=

196).

●Adjust brightness by using ash exposure compensation or changing the ash

output level (=

76, =

85).

●Increase the ISO speed (=

62).

Subjects in ash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-out.

●Shoot within ash range (=

196).

●Lower the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (=

36).

●Adjust brightness by using ash exposure compensation or changing the ash

output level (=

76, =

85).

White spots appear in ash shots.

●This is caused by light from the ash reecting off dust or airborne particles.

Shots look grainy.

●Lower the ISO speed (=

62).

●High ISO speeds in some shooting modes may cause grainy images (=

51).

Shooting

Cannot shoot.

●Pictures cannot be taken unless the focus is right. Press the shutter button

halfway to focus on subjects. Once the frame is colored green, you can take the

picture.

●In Playback mode (=

93), press the shutter button halfway (=

28).

Strange display on the screen under low light (=

30).

Strange display on the screen when shooting.

●Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images, but are

recorded in movies.

- The screen may icker and horizontal banding may appear under uorescent

or LED lighting.

[] ashes on the screen when the shutter button is pressed, and shooting

is not possible (=

38).

[] is displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway (=

38).

●Use the Image Stabilizer when shooting (=

78).

●Raise the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (=

75).

●Increase the ISO speed (=

62).

●Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. Additionally,

the Image Stabilizer should not be used with a tripod or other means to secure

the camera (=

78).

Shots are out of focus.

●Use autofocus (AF) to shoot.

●Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the

way down to shoot (=

28).

●The camera will not go into focus if you are closer than the minimum focusing

distance of the lens. Check the lens you are using for its minimum focusing

distance. The lens minimum focusing distance is measured from the [ ] (focal

plane) mark on the top of the camera to the subject.

●Set [AF-assist Beam (LED) ring] to [0:Enable] (=

88).

●Conrm that unneeded functions, such as Manual Focus, are deactivated.

●Try shooting with focus lock or AF lock (=

70, =

71).

170

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Shooting Movies

The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted.

●Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports

high-speed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the

length of movies on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time.

A “full buffer” warning (=

174) is displayed and shooting stops

automatically.

●The camera’s internal memory buffer lled up as the camera could not record to

the memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures.

- Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (=

138).

- Lower the image quality (=

45).

- Switch to a memory card that supports high-speed recording.

Subjects look distorted.

●Subjects that pass in front of the camera quickly may look distorted. This is not a

malfunction.

Movie seems to stop momentarily.

●With some lenses, the movie is recorded in such a way that the image appears to

drop a frame at moments when the brightness changes signicantly.

Playback

Playback is not possible.

●Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename

les or alter the folder structure.

Playback stops, or audio skips.

●Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the

camera (=

138).

●There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards

that have slow read speeds.

●When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may

skip if computer performance is inadequate.

Sound is not played during movies.

●Adjust the volume (=

93) if the sound in the movie is faint.

●No sound is played for movies shot in [ ] mode (=

55) because audio is not

recorded in this mode.

There is linear noise or a moiré pattern in the image

●Depending on the subject, linear noise or a moiré pattern may appear in the

image.

This can occur especially in - the following conditions.

- Subjects with ne horizontal stripes or checkered patterns, etc.

- When there are strong light sources such as sunlight or illumination in or close

to the shooting screen.

In these situations, noise and moiré patterns can be reduced by taking the

following actions.

- Change the shooting range or zoom factor, or resize the subject.

- Recompose the shot so that strong light sources do not enter the shooting

screen.

- Attach a hood to the lens so that strong light sources do not enter the lens.

●If you shift or tilt the lens when using a TS-E lens, linear noise or a moiré pattern

may be recorded in the image.

Subjects are affected by red-eye.

●Set [Red-eye reduc.] to [On] (=

47). The red-eye reduction lamp (=

will be activated in ash shots. For best results, have subjects look at the red-eye

reduction lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at

closer range.

●Edit images using red-eye correction (=

112).

Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting is

slower.

●Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (=

138).

Continuous shooting suddenly stops.

●To protect the camera, continuous shooting will stop after 1000 pictures in a

single shot. Release your nger from the shutter button once, and resume

shooting.

Shooting settings or the quick setting menu is not available.

●Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions Available in

Each Shooting Mode”, “Quick Settings”, “Shooting Tabs”, “C.Fn Tab”, “INFO.

Quick Control”, and “Set UP Tab” (=

177 – =

187).

Touch AF or Touch Shutter does not work.

●Touch AF or Touch Shutter will not work if you touch the edges of the screen.

Touch closer to the center of the screen.

171

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

●The write-protect tab of the memory card in the destination camera is set to the

locked position. Slide the write-protect tab to the unlocked position.

●RAW images cannot be imported to the camera or displayed on a TV set. If you

select a RAW image on the smartphone, it is imported as a JPEG le. Send RAW

images using Image Sync.

●Images are not sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services if you

move or rename image les or folders on the computer that received images sent

using Image Sync via an access point (=

131). Before moving or renaming

these image les or folders on the computer, make sure the images have already

been sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services.

Cannot resize images for sending.

●Images cannot be resized to be bigger than the resolution setting of their original

size.

●Movies cannot be resized.

Images take a long time to send/The wireless connection is disrupted.

●Multiple images may take a long time to send. Try resizing the image to [ ] or

[] to reduce sending time (=

131).

●Movies may take a long time to send.

●Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as

microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4

GHz band. Note that images may take a long time to send even when [ ] is

displayed.

●Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as

the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.

Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing of the

camera or giving it to someone else.

●Reset the Wi-Fi settings (=

136).

Computer

Cannot transfer images to a computer.

●When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the

transfer speed as follows.

- Press the [ ] button to enter Playback mode. Hold the [ ] button

down as you press the [ ] and [ ] buttons at the same time. On the next

screen, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [B], and then press the [ ] button.

Wi-Fi

Cannot access the Wi-Fi menu by pressing the [ ] button.

●The Wi-Fi menu is not available in Shooting mode. Switch to Playback mode and

try again.

●In Playback mode, the Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during magnied display

or index display. Switch to single-image display and try again. Similarly, the Wi-Fi

menu cannot be accessed during ltered image display according to specied

conditions. Cancel ltered image playback.

●The Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed while the camera is connected to a printer.

Disconnect the cable.

Cannot add a device/destination.

●A total of 20 items of connection information can be added to the camera. Erase

unneeded connection information from the camera rst, and then add new

devices/destinations (=

135).

●Use a computer or smartphone to register Web services (=

122).

●To add a smartphone, rst install the dedicated application on your smartphone

116).

●Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as

microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4

GHz band.

●Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as

the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.

Cannot connect to the access point.

●Conrm that the access point channel is set to a channel supported by the

camera (=

194). Note that instead of auto channel assignment, it is advisable to

specify a supported channel manually.

Cannot send images.

●The destination device has insufcient storage space. Increase the storage space

on the destination device and resend the images.

172

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Cannot magnify!/Cannot rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/

Unselectable image.

●The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or

already edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that

starred (*) functions are not available for movies.

Magnify (=

100)*, Rotation (=

107)*, Rating (=

108), Editing (=

109)*,

Print List (=

164)*, Photobook Set-up (=

166)*

Invalid selection range

●When specifying a range for image selection (=

103, =

106, =

165), you

attempted to choose an initial image that was after the nal image, or vice-versa.

Exceeded selection limit

●More than 998 images were selected for Print List (=

164) or Photobook Set-up

166). Choose 998 images or less.

●Print List (=

164) or Photobook Set-up (=

166) settings could not be saved

correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again.

●You attempted to choose more than 500 images in Protect (=

102), Erase

105), Rating (=

108), Print List (=

164), or Photobook Set-up (=

166).

Naming error!

●The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded, because the

highest supported folder number (999) for storing images on the card has been

reached and the highest supported image number (9999) for images in folders

has been reached. Either format the memory card (=

138) or go to the menu

32), select the [ 1] tab, and change [File No.] to [Auto Reset] (=

137).

Lens Error

●Communication between the camera and lens is faulty. Clean the lens contacts

and t correctly on the camera.

●Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this

case, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.

A camera error was detected (error number)

●If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not

have been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image.

●Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this

case, write down the error number (Exx) and contact a Canon Customer Support

Help Desk.

File Error

●Correct printing (=

160) may not be possible for photos from other cameras or

images that have been altered using computer software, even if the camera is

connected to the printer.

On-screen Messages

If an error message is displayed, respond as follows.

Capture or Playback

No memory card

●The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory

card facing the correct way (=

17).

Memory card locked

●The write-protect tab of the memory card is set to the locked position. Switch the

write-protect tab to the unlocked position (=

17).

Cannot record!

●Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a

memory card facing the correct way (=

17).

Memory card error (=

138)

●If the same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a

supported memory card (=

2) and have inserted it facing the correct way

17), contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.

Insufcient space on card

●There is not enough free space on the memory card to shoot (=

35, =

48,

60) or edit images (=

109). Either erase unneeded images (=

105) or

insert a memory card with enough free space (=

17).

Touch AF canceled

●The subject selected for Touch AF can no longer be detected (=

71).

Charge the battery (=

16)

No Image.

●The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed.

Protected! (=

102)

Unidentied Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large./Cannot play back

MOV/Cannot play back MP4

●Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed.

●It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a

computer, or images shot with another camera.

173

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Receiving failed

Insufcient space on card

●There is not enough free space on the memory card in the target camera to

receive images. Erase images to create space on the memory card, or insert a

memory card with sufcient space.

Receiving failed

Memory card locked

●The write-protect tab of the memory card in the camera to receive the images is

set to the locked position. Slide the write-protect tab to the unlocked position.

Receiving failed

Naming error!

●When the highest folder number (999) and the highest image number (9999)

have been reached on the receiving camera, images cannot be received.

Insufcient space on server

●Delete unnecessary images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to create

space.

●Save the images sent via Image Sync (=

131) to your computer.

Check network settings

●Check to make sure your computer can connect to the Internet with the current

network settings.

Print error

●Check the paper size setting (=

162). If this error message is displayed when

the setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera

again.

Ink absorber full

●Contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance with ink

absorber replacement.

Wi-Fi

Connection failed

●No access points were recognized. Check the access point settings (=

120).

●A device could not be found. Turn the camera off and on again, and retry the

connection.

●Check the device you want to connect to and make sure it is ready for connection.

Cannot determine access point

●The WPS buttons on numerous access points were pressed simultaneously. Try

reconnecting again.

No access points found

●Check to make sure that the access point is turned on.

●When connecting to an access point manually, make sure that you entered the

correct SSID.

Incorrect password/Incorrect Wi-Fi security settings

●Check the access point security settings (=

119).

IP address conict

●Reset the IP address so that it does not conict with another.

Disconnected/Receiving failed/Sending failed

●You may be in an environment where Wi-Fi signals are obstructed.

●Avoid using the camera’s Wi-Fi function around microwave ovens, Bluetooth

devices, and other devices that operate on the 2.4 GHz band.

●Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as

the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.

●Check the connected device to make sure it is not experiencing errors.

Sending failed

Memory card error

●If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted

memory card facing the correct way, contact a Canon Customer Support Help

Desk.

174

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

(13) Battery level (=

174)

(14) Still image quality (compression,

resolution) (=

43)

(15) Recordable shots

(16) Maximum burst

(17) Movie quality (resolution, frame

rate) (=

45)

(18) Remaining time

(19) Histogram (=

96)

(20) Quick setting menu (=

31)

(21) Manual focus (=

74)

(22) Grid lines (=

30)

(23) AF frame (=

69)

(24) AE Point frame (=

62)

(25) Self-timer (=

40)

(26) Electronic level (=

46)

(27) Magnify (=

74)

(28) AE lock (=

61)

(29) Shutter speed (=

82)

(30) Aperture value (=

83)

(31) Exposure compensation (=

61)

(32) Highlight tone priority (=

64)

(33) ISO speed (=

62)

(34) Buffer warning (=

170)

(35) Camera shake warning (=

38)

(36) Recording mode (=

59)

(37) Attenuator (=

59)

(38) Wind filter (=

59)

(39) Time zone (=

141)

(40) Eco mode (=

139)

(41) AE lock (movie) (=

58)

(42) AF/MF toggle (=

57)

(43) Movie Servo AF (=

57)

Battery Level

An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level.

Display Details

Sufcient charge

Slightly depleted, but sufcient.

(Blinking red) Nearly depleted. Recharge the battery.

[Charge the battery] No charge left. Recharge the battery

immediately.

On-screen Information

During Shooting

(1) Shooting mode (=

177), Scene

icon (=

39)

(2) Flash mode (=

75), LED light

155)

(3) Flash exposure compensation

/ Flash output level (=

76,

85)

(4) Metering mode (=

62)

(5) High ISO speed NR(=

80)

(6) Continuous shooting (=

42)

(7) Picture Style (=

67)

(8) AEB (=

63)

(9) Auto Lighting Optimizer (=

64)

(10) White balance (=

65)

(11) White balance correction

66)

(12) Touch Shutter (=

41)

175

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Info Display 2

(1) Shooting date/time

(2) Histogram

(3) Shooting mode

(4) Shutter speed

(5) Aperture value

(6) Exposure compensation

(7) ISO speed

(8) Highlight tone priority

(9) White balance

(10) White balance correction

(11) Picture Style settings

(12) Flash exposure compensation

(13) Metering mode

(14) Auto Lighting Optimizer

(15) Red-eye correction

(16) Image quality*

(17) Resolution

(18) Image size

* Cropped images have [ ] displayed.

Info Display 3

Shows the lens name, focal distance, and an RGB histogram. The screen

may not be wide enough to display the full name of the lens. The display

on the top of the screen is the same as Info Display 2.

Info Display 4

Displays Picture Style data. The display on the top of the screen is the

same as Info Display 2.

Playback

Info Display 1

(1) Image shown/number of target

images

(2) Battery level

(3) Wi-Fi status

(4) Settings can be applied to [ ]

mode

(5) Sent to Image Sync

(6) Edited*1

(7) Rating

(8) Protect

(9) Folder number - File number

(10) Shutter speed

(11) Aperture value

(12) Exposure compensation level

(13) ISO speed

(14) Highlight tone priority

(15) Image quality*2

*1 Displayed on images that have Creative Filter, resize, cropping, or red-eye

correction applied to them.

*2 Cropped images have [ ] displayed.

176

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

●During movie playback, you can skip back or forward (or to the

previous or next clip) by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.

●To switch frames, touch the scrollbar or drag left or right.

Info Display 5

Displays noise-reduction settings for long exposure and high-speed

shooting. The display on the top of the screen is the same as Info Display

Info Display 6

Displays lens correction data, peripheral illumination, and chromatic

aberration data. The display on the top of the screen is the same as Info

Display 2.

Summary of Movie Control Panel

The following operations are available on the movie control panel shown

in [View] (=

93).

Playback

Slow Motion (Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the playback

speed. No sound is played.)

(To adjust the playback speed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn

the [ ] dial. No sound is played.)

Skip Backward* or Previous Clip (=

114) (To continue skipping

backward, keep touching the [ ] button.)

Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the [ ]

button.)

Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)

Skip Forward* or Next Clip (=

114) (To continue skipping

forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)

Erase Clip (displayed when a digest movie is selected (=

114))

Edit (=

113)

Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible

printer (=

160).

* Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame.

177

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Functions and Menu Tables

Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode

Shooting Mode

Function

Exposure compensation (=

61)

OOOOO

– – *1

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

–

ISO speed (=

62)

AUTO *2

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

100 – 6400 *2

OOOO

––––––––––––––––––

8000, 10000, 12800 *2

OOOO

–––––––––––––––––––

Flash (=

75)

Auto *2 – – –

OOOOO

–

– –

OOOOOOO

– –

On *2

OOOO

– –

O O

–

O O

–

OOOOOOO

– –

Slow Synchro *2 –

–

*3 *3

––––*3–––––––––––

Off *2

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

External Flash Firing (=

154) *2

OOOOOOOO

–

O O

–

OOOOOOO

– –

Flash Exposure Compensation (=

76) *2

OOOO

––*4––––––––––––––––

Flash Output (=

85) *2

OOO

––––––––––––––––––––

Aperture value (=

83) *2

O O

––––––––––––––––––––

Shutter speed (=

82) *2

–

–––––––––––––––––––

Bulb Exposures (=

85) *2

––––––––––––––––––––––

Program Shift (=

62) *2 – – –

–––––––––––––––––––

178

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Shooting Mode

Function

AE Lock (=

58, =

61), FE Lock (=

76) *2

OOOO

–––––––––––––––––*5*5

AE Lock when shooting movies, Exposure

Compensation (=

58) *2

OOOO

–––

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

Manual Focus (=

74)*6*2

OOOO

– –

OOOO

–

OOOOOOOOOOOO

Manual Focus Switching when Shooting Movies

57) *2

OOOO

– –

OOOO

–

OOOOOOOOOOOO

Move AF Frame (=

71) *2

OOOO

– –

OOOOOOOO

–

O O

–––

OOO

Touch AF (=

71) *2

OOOOOOOOOOOOOO

–

O O

–––

OOO

Face Select (=

71) *2

OOOOOOOOOOOOOO

–

O O

–

OOOOO

Magnied Display (=

74) *2

OOOO

– –

OOOOO

–

––––––––––

Touch Shutter (=

41) *2

OOOOOOOOOOOOOO

O O

–

OOO

– –

Single Frame Shoot when shooting movies

58)*8*2

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

–

OOOOO

Change Display

30, =

61)

Custom display 1/

Custom display 2/

No info display

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

INFO. Quick Control *2

OOOO

–––––––––––––––––

O O

*1 Set using [Brightness].

*2 Adjustable content depends on added shooting modes.

*3 Not selectable. However, switches to [ ] in some cases.

*4 Geared to [Brightness] setting.

*5 AE Lock only.

*6 Manual Focus when switched to MF using switch on EF lens or EF-S lens.

*7 Shooting only. Subject cannot be specied.

*8 Stills are shot with the same aspect ratio as movies.

Selectable or set automatically. – Not selectable.

179

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Quick Settings

Shooting Mode

Function

AF method (=

69)

OOOOOO

OOOOOOO

–

O O

–

OOOOO

OOOO

– – *2

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

AF operation (=

72)

OOOOOO

OOO

–

OOOOOOOOOOOO

OOOO

– – *2 – – –

– –

–

O O

–

– –

Image quality (=

43) See “Shooting Tabs” (=

181).

Movie

rec. size

45)

When set to

[NTSC]

/*1

OOOOOO

OOOOOOOOOO

–

OOOOO

/*1

OOOOOO

OOOOOOOOOO

OOOOO

When set to

[PAL]

OOOOOO

OOOOOOOOOO

–

OOOOO

/*1

OOOOOO

OOOOOOOOOO

OOOOO

Drive Mode (=

42)

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

OOOOO

– –

OOOO

–

––––––––

O O

Self-timer/Remote ctrl

40)

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

/ / *1

OOOOOO

–

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

White balance (=

65)

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

/ / / /

/*1

OOOO

–––––––––––––––––

O O

OOOO

–––––––––––––––––––

WB Correciton (=

66) *1

OOOO

–––––––––––––––––

O O

180

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Shooting Mode

Function

Picture Style (=

67)

OOOOOO

–

OOOO

–

––––––––

O O

OOOO

– –

––––

–

OOOOOOOOOO

/ /

/ / *1

OOOO

–––––––––––––––––

O O

OOOO

––*5––––––––––––––

O O

Auto Lighting Optimizer

64)

OOOO

– –

––––

–

OOOOOOOOOO

/*1

OOOO

–––––––––––––––––

O O

OOOOOO

–

OOOO

–

––––––––

O O

Metering mode (=

62)

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

/ / *1

OOOO

–––––––––––––––––––

Still Image Aspect Ratio

45)

OOOOOO

OOOOOOOOOO

–

OOO

– –

/*1

OOOOO

– *6

OOOOOOOOOOOOOO

*7 *7

OOOOO

– *6

OOOOOOOOOO

–

OOO

– –

*1 Adjustable content depends on added shooting modes.

*2 Set using menu tab [ 2].

*3 Set using menu tab [ 5].

*4 Synchronizes with aspect ratio setting and is automatically set (=

55).

*5 If [Monochrome] is set to anything other than [ ], it is set automatically.

*6 Set using menu tab [ 1].

*7 Set automatically, geared to aspect ratio of movie rec. size.

Selectable or set automatically. – Not selectable.

181

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Shooting Tabs

Shooting Mode

Function

Image quality (=

43)

JPEG

– *1

OOOOO

– –

––––––––––

O O

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

/ / /

/ /

OOOOO

–

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

RAW

– *1

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

OOOOO

– –

––––––––––

O O

Still Image Aspect Ratio (=

45) See “Quick Settings” (=

179).

Shooting information display (=

87) *1

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

Reverse Disp. (=

29) On/Off *1

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

Image review (=

47)*2

Off/2 sec./

4 sec./

8 sec./Hold

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

Touch Shutter (=

41)

Enable *1

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

–

OOO

– –

Disable *1

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

Display Mode (=

153)*3

Power

Saving *1

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

Smooth *1

OOOOO

––––––––––––––––––

182

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Shooting Mode

Function

AF operation (=

72) See “Quick Settings” (=

179).

AF method (=

69) See “Quick Settings” (=

179).

Continuous AF (=

73)

On *1

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

Off *1

OOOOOOOOOO

–

OOOOOOOOOO

– –

AF+MF (=

73)

On *1

OOOO

– –

OOOO

–

OOOOOOOOOOOO

Off *1

OOOO

– –

OOOO

–

OOOOOOOOOOOO

MF Peaking Settings (=

74) *1

OOOO

– –

OOOO

–

OOOOOOOOOOOO

IS Settings

78)

IS Mode*4

Off *1

OOOO

–

OOOOOO

–

OOOOOOOOOOO

Continuous *1

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

Dynamic

IS*5

1 *1

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

–

OOOOO

2 *1

OOOOOOOOOOO

–

OOOOOOOOOOO

Lens aberration correction (=

79) *1

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

183

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Shooting Mode

Function

3*6

AEB (=

63) *1

OOOO

–––––––––––––––––––

ISO speed

62)

ISO Speed See “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode” (=

177).

ISO Auto *1

OOOO

––––––––––––––––––

Highlight tone priority (=

64) *1

OOOO

–––––––––––––––––

O O

Auto Lighting Optimizer (=

64) See “Quick Settings” (=

179).

Metering mode (=

62) See “Quick Settings” (=

179).

Flash Control

Flash ring (=

75) Refer to “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode” (=

177).

E-TTL II meter.

77)

Evaluative/

Average *1

OOOO

–––––––––––––––––––

Red-eye reduc.

47) On/Off *1

OOOOOOOO

–

O O

–

OOOOOOO

– –

Built-in ash settings

Flash Mode

85)

E-TTL II *1

OOOOOOOO

–

O O

–

OOOOOOO

– –

Manual ash

OOO

––––––––––––––––––––

Shutter

Sync.

77)

1st curtain *1

OOOOOOOO

–

O O

–

OOOOOOO

– –

2nd curtain *1

OOOO

– –

––––––––––––––––

exp. comp. See “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode” (=

177).

External ash func. setting

155) *1

OOOO

–––––––––––––––––––

External ash C.Fn setting

156) *1

OOOO

–––––––––––––––––––

Clear settings (=

77, =

157) *1

OOOO

––*7––––––––––––––––

184

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Shooting Mode

Function

4*8

Custom White Balance (=

65) *1

OOOO

–––––––––––––––––

O O

WB Correction (=

66) See “Quick Settings” (=

179).

Picture Style (=

67) See “Quick Settings” (=

179).

High ISO speed NR

80)

Standard *1

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

Disable/

Low/High/

Multi Shot

Noise

Reduction

OOOO

–––––––––––––––––––

Long exp. noise

reduction (=

81)

Disable *1

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

Auto/Enable *1

OOOO

–––––––––––––––––––

Digest Type (=

37)

Include

Stills/No

Stills

––––––

–––––––––––––––––

AF auto switch (=

40)

Enable – – – – –

––––––––––––––––––

Disable

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

Keep setting (=

48) Disable/

Enable –––––––

––––––––––––––––

185

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Shooting Mode

Function

Movie rec. size (=

45) See “Quick Settings” (=

179).

Sound Recording (=

59)

Sound recording

Auto/Enable *1

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

–

OOOOO

Manual *1

OOOO

–––––––––––––––––

O O

Disable *1

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

Rec. level *1

OOOO

–––––––––––––––––

O O

Wind lter/

Attenuator

Wind Filter

Auto *1

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

–

OOOOO

Off *1

OOOO

–––––––––––––

–––

O O

Attenuator

Off *1

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

On *1

OOOO

–––––––––––––––––

O O

Movie Servo AF

57)

Enable *1

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

–

OOOOO

Disable *1

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

AF w/ shutter button

during (=

58)

ONE SHOT/

Disable *1

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

*1 Adjustable content depends on added shooting modes.

*2 Locked at [OFF] when [ ] and [ ] are both selected.

*3 Only displayed when the Electronic Viewnder is attached.

*4 Not displayed when using EF lens, EF-S lens or EF-M lens without image

stabilization.

*5 Only displayed when using a lens that supports dynamic image stabilization.

*6 In [ ] mode, items from the [ 5] tab are shown on the [ 3] tab.

*7 [Clear built-in ash set.] only.

*8 In [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] and [ ] modes,

items from the [ 5] tab are shown on the [ 4] tab.

Selectable or set automatically. – Not selectable.

186

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

C.Fn Tab

Shooting Mode

Function

C.Fn I:

Exposure

88)

ISO

expansion

0:Off *

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

1:On *

OOOO

––––––––––––––––––

Safety shift

0:Off *

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

1:On * –

O O

––––––––––––––––––––

C.Fn II:

Autofocus

88)

AF-assist

beam (LED)

ring

0:Enable *

OOOOO

–

OOOO

–

OOOOOOOOOOOO

1:Disable *

OOOO

–

––––

––––––––––

O O

C.Fn III:

Others

88)

Custom

Controls

Shutter/AE lock *

OOOO

–––––––––––––––––

O O

Dials *

OOOO

–––––––––––––––––

O O

M-Fn button *

OOOO

–––––––––––––––––

O O

button *

OOOO

–––––––––––– –––––

O O

button *

OOOO

–––––––––––––––––––

Release

shutter w/o

lens

0:Disable *

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

1:Enable *

OOOO

–––––––––––––––––

O O

Retract lens

on power off

0:Enable *

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

1:Disable *

OOOO

–––––––––––––––––

O O

Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn) (=

89) *

OOOO

–––––––––––––––––

O O

* Adjustable content depends on added shooting modes.

Selectable or set automatically. – Not selectable.

187

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Set Up Tab

Tab Item Ref. Page

Create Folder =

137

File Numbering =

137

Format =

138

Video system =

139

Display Control *1=

154

Electronic Level =

Eco Mode =

139

Power Saving =

LCD Brightness =

140

Time Zone =

141

Date/Time =

141

Language =

141

Beep =

142

Hints & Tips =

142

Touch Operation =

142

Sensor cleaning =

142

Wi-Fi Settings =

115

Certication Logo Display =

144

Custom shooting mode (C) *2=

144

Clear all camera settings *3=

145

Firmware Ver.: *.*.* *4=

145

*1 Only displayed when an electronic viewnder is installed.

*2 Only available in [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] mode.

*3 Not available in [ ] mode.

*4 Only available in [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] mode.

INFO. Quick Control

The Adjusting Shooting Functions from a Single Screen (=

61) is not

displayed in [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ],

[ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] modes.

Shooting Mode

Function

Movie Mode – – – – –

O O

Shutter speed *

–

– –

Aperture value *

O O

–––

ISO speed *

OOOO

–

AEB *

OOOO

– –

Flash exposure compensation *

OOOO

– –

Flash ring *

OOOO

– –

Sound recording – – – – –

O O

Picture Style *

OOOOOO

White balance *

OOOOOO

WB Correction *

OOOOOO

Auto Lighting Optimizer *

OOOOOO

Function Assignment *

OOOOOO

Metering mode *

OOOO

– –

Drive Mode *

OOOO

– –

Wind Filter – – – – –

O O

Attenuator – – – – –

O O

Self-timer/Remote ctrl *

OOOOOO

Movie rec. size *

OOOOOO

Image quality *

OOOOOO

Selectable or set automatically. – Not selectable.

* Adjustable content depends on added shooting modes.

188

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Playback Mode Quick Settings

Item Ref. Page

Protect =

102

Rotate =

107

Rating =

108

Image Search =

Play Movie =

Play Linked Digest Movie =

Print =

160

Resize =

109

Cropping =

110

Creative lters =

111

Apply settings to =

My Menu Tab

Tabs Item Ref. Page

1My Menu settings =

Playback Tab

Tabs Item Ref. Page

Protect =

102

Rotate =

107

Erase =

105

Rating =

108

Slideshow =

101

List/Play Digest Movies =

Image Search =

Creative lters =

111

Resize =

109

Cropping =

110

Red-Eye Correction =

112

Print settings =

161

Photobook Set-up =

166

Transition Effect =

Index Effect =

Scroll Display =

Auto Rotate =

108

Resume =

Playback information display =

Magnify (approx.) =

100

189

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

●Besides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare cases lubricant

from the camera’s internal parts may adhere to the front of the sensor.

If visible spots still remain after the automatic sensor cleaning, having

the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.

●Periodically cleaning the camera’s body and lens mount with a soft

lens cleaning cloth is recommended.

Handling Precautions

●The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or

subjecting it to strong impact.

●Never leave the camera near anything that has a strong magnetic eld

such as a magnet or electric motor. Strong magnetic elds can cause

camera malfunction or image data loss.

●If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with

a dry soft cloth, such as an eyeglass cloth. Do not rub hard or apply

force.

●Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera

or screen.

●Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens. If cleaning is difcult,

contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.

●If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room,

condensation may form on the camera. To prevent condensation, rst

put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to the warmer

temperature before taking it out of the bag.

●Store the battery inside a sealed plastic bag or other protective

covering. To preserve battery function, if it is not used for long periods

of time, recharge around once per year, then use up the charge

completely before placing in storage.

●If condensation does form on the camera, stop using it immediately.

Continuing to use the camera in this state may damage it. Remove the

lens, battery pack and memory card, and wait until the moisture has

evaporated before resuming use.

●Do not touch the camera or lens contacts. Doing so may lead to

camera malfunction.

●The image sensor is visible after the lens is removed. Do not touch the

image sensor, as this may lead to scratching.

●Do not block the shutter operation with your nger, etc. Doing so may

cause a malfunction.

●After detaching the lens from the camera, put down the lens with the

rear end up and attach the lens caps to avoid scratching the lens

surface and contacts.

190

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Recording System

Recording

format Design rule for Camera File System (DCF) 2.0

Image type JPEG, RAW (14-bit Canon original) RAW+JPEG

Simultaneous recording possible

Resolution

L (Large): Approx. 24 megapixels (6000 x

4000)

M (Medium): Approx. 12.40 megapixels

(4320 x 2880)

S1 (Small 1): Approx. 5.50 megapixels (2880

x 1920)

S2 (Small 2): Approx. 3.50 megapixels (2304

x 1536)

S3 (Small 3): Approx. 350,000 pixels (720 x

480)

RAW: Approx. 24 megapixels (6000 x

4000)

Specications

Type

Type Digital single-lens non-reex AF/AE camera

Recording

media

SD memory card, SDHC memory card, SDXC

memory card

* Compatible with UHS-I

Image sensor

size Approx. 22.3 × 14.9 mm

Compatible

lenses

Canon EF-M, EF*, and EF-S* lenses

* Mount Adapter EF-EOS M required.

(35mm lm equivalent focal length is approx. 1.6

times the lens focal length)

Lens mount Canon EF-M mount

Image Sensor

Type CMOS sensor

Effective pixels Approx. 24.2 million pixels

Total pixels Approx. 24.7 million pixels

Aspect ratio 3:2

Dust cleaning

feature

Automatically or manually executed when turned

on/off

191

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Exposure Control

Metering modes

Real-time metering with image sensor

Evaluative metering (384 zones),

Partial metering (approx. 10 % of shooting

screen),

Spot metering (approx. 2 % of shooting screen),

Center Weighted Avg.

Brightness

metering range EV 1 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100)

Exposure control Program AE, Shutter priority AE, Aperture

priority AE, Manual exposure

ISO speed

(Recommended

exposure index)

Manually set ISO 100 – 12800, equivalent to

25600 when expanded

Automatic setting possible

Exposure

compensation

Manual: ± 3 stops in 1/3-stop increments

AEB: ± 2 stops in 1/3-stop increments (can be

combined with manual exposure compensation)

AE lock

Auto: Applied in One-Shot AF with evaluative

metering when focus is achieved

Manual: With AE lock button

Image Processing during Shooting

Picture Style Auto, Standard, Portrait, Landscape, Neutral,

Faithful, Monochrome, User Def. 1 - 3

White balance

Auto, Preset (Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten

light, White uorescent light, Flash), Custom white

balance correction feature available

*Flash color temperature information transmission

enabled

Noise reduction Applicable to long exposures and high ISO speed

shots

Automatic

image

brightness

correction

Auto Lighting Optimizer

Highlight tone

priority Provided

Lens aberration

correction Peripheral illumin., Chromatic aberration

Autofocus

Type Hybrid CMOS AF III method (1-point AF, face +

tracking priority AF)

AF points 49 points (Max.)

Focusing

brightness

range

EV 2 - 18 (at room temperature, ISO 100)

AF operation One-Shot AF, Servo AF

AF-assist beam Built-in (LED lamp)

192

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Still Photo Shooting

Aspect ratio

settings 3:2, 4:3, 16:9, 1:1

Focus mode AF, MF (manual focusing, approx. 5x / 10x

magnication possible), AF+MF

Continuous AF Provided

Touch shutter Provided

Grid display Two types

Creative Filters Included as a shooting mode

Depth-of-eld

preview Provided

Movie Shooting Settings

Recording

System MP4

Movie MPEG-4 AVC/H.264

Variable (average) bit rate

Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC

Recording size

and frame rate

1920x1080 (Full HD): 29.97fps (NTSC) /

23.98fps* (NTSC) / 25.00fps (PAL)

1280x720 (HD): 59.94fps (NTSC) / 50.00fps

(PAL)

640x480 (SD): 29.97fps (NTSC) / 25.00fps (PAL)

*The actual frame rate is; 23.976fps

File size

1920 x 1080 (29.97 fps/23.98 fps/25.00 fps):

172.6 MB/min.

1280 x 720 (59.94 fps/50.00 fps): 115.4 MB/min.

640 x 480 (29.97 fps/25.00 fps): 22.4 MB/min.

Focusing

Hybrid CMOS AF III method* (1-point AF, face +

tracking priority AF)

Manual focus

*Focusing brightness range: EV 2 - 18 (at room

temperature, ISO 100)

Focus mode AF, MF (manual focusing), AF+MF

Metering modes Evaluative

Shutter

Type Electronically controlled, focal-plane shutter

Shutter speed

1/4000 sec. to 30 sec. (Total shutter speed range;

available range varies by shooting mode), Bulb,

X-sync at 1/200 sec.

Flash

Built-in Flash

Retracting, manual pop-up ash

Guide number approx. 5 (ISO 100/m)

Supports angle of view equivalent to focal length

of approx. 18 mm (35mm lm equivalent: approx.

29 mm)

Recharging time approx. 3 sec.

External ash EX-series Speedlites (Flash functions can be set

with the camera)

Flash metering

mode E-TTL II autoash

Flash exposure

compensation ±2 stops in 1/3-stop increments

FE lock Provided

PC terminal None

Drive, Self-timer System

Drive mode Single shooting, continuous shooting

Continuous

shooting speed Max. 4.2 fps

Max. burst

JPEG: Approx. 1000 images

RAW: Approx. 5 images

RAW+ JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 4 images

*Measured by Canon testing standards (ISO 100,

Picture Style: using standard settings), using a

16 GB UHS-I memory card, which complies with

Canon testing standards.

Self-timer

mode

Off/2-second self-timer/10-second self-timer/

Remote control

193

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Playback

Image display

formats

Single image display, Single image + Info display

(Basic info, shooting info, histogram, lens info,

Picture Style, noise reduction, and correction

data), image index (6/12/42/110), image rotate

possible

Zoom

magnication Approx. 1.5x - 10x

Highlight alert Overexposed highlights blink

Image browsing

methods

Single image, jump by 10 or 100 images, lter

images (by shooting date, by people, by movies,

by stills, by rating), Scroll Display

Image rotate Provided

Rating Provided

Movie playback Enabled (LCD monitor, HDMI OUT) Built-in

speaker

Protect images Provided

Slideshow All images/Filter images by image search

Transition effect: Off/Fade

Post-processing of Images

Possible only with images taken with the same model

Creative lters

Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold

effect, Water painting effect, Toy camera effect,

Miniature effect

Resize Provided

Red-Eye

Correction Provided

Servo AF Provided

Brightness

metering range EV 1 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100)

Exposure

control Program AE for movies and manual exposure

Exposure

compensation ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments

ISO speed

(Recommended

exposure index)

With automatic exposure: ISO 100 - 3200 (Full

HD) / ISO 100 - 6400 (HD/SD) set automatically

With manual exposure: ISO 100 - 3200 (Full

HD) / ISO 100 - 6400 (HD/SD) set automatically/

manually, H (ISO 6400 (Full HD) / ISO 12800

(HD/SD) equivalent) speed possible

Miniature effect

movie Provided

Sound recording

Built-in stereo microphone

External stereo microphone terminal provided

Audio recording level adjustable, wind lter

(for built-in microphone) provided, attenuator

provided

Grid display Two types

LCD Monitor

Type TFT color, liquid-crystal monitor

Monitor size

and dots

Wide, 7.7 cm (3.0 in.) (3:2) with approx. 1.04

million dots

Angle

adjustment Provided

Brightness

adjustment Manual (5 levels)

Interface

languages 25 languages

Hints & Tips Displayable

194

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Wi-Fi

Standards compliance IEEE 802.11b/g/n

Transmission Methods DS-SS modulation (IEEE 802.11b) OFDM

modulation (IEEE 802.11g/n)

Transmission range

Approx. 15 m (49.21 ft.)

* When connected to a smartphone

* With no obstructions between the

transmitting and receiving antennas and no

radio interference

Transmission

frequency (central

frequency)

Frequency: 2412 to 2462 MHz

Channels: 1 to 11 ch

Connection method

Infrastructure mode*, camera access point

mode, ad hoc mode

*Wi-Fi Protected Setup supported

Security

Authentication method: Open system,

Shared key, WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK

Encryption: WEP, TKIP, AES

Network Functions

Transfer images

between cameras

Transferring one image, Transferring

selected images, Transferring resized

images

Connection to

smartphones

Viewing/controlling/receiving images

using a smartphone

Sending images to a smartphone

connected via NFC

Remote control of the camera using a

smartphone.

Print from Wi-Fi printers Images to be printed can be sent to a

printer supporting Wi-Fi.

Send images to a Web

service

Images in the camera or links to images

can be sent to registered Web services.

View images using a

media player

Images can be viewed using a DLNA-

compatible media player.

Direct Printing

Type PictBridge (USB and Wireless LAN)

Printable

images

JPEG and RAW images (Can print RAW images

displayed as JPEG only with images taken with

the same model)

Print ordering DPOF Version 1.1 compatible

Custom Functions

Custom

Functions 6 types

My Menu

registration Provided

Interface

Digital terminal PC networking for direct print (Hi-Speed USB

equivalent)

HDMI mini OUT

terminal Type C (auto-switching of resolution)

External

microphone IN

terminal

3.5 mm diameter stereo mini-jack

Wireless

remote control Compatible with Remote Controller RC-6

195

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Number of Shots per Memory Card

Using a 16 GB memory card

Image

Quality

File Size

(Approx. MB)

Recordable

Shots (Approx.)

Maximum Burst

(Approx.)

9.0 1680 1000

5.8 2612 1000

3.6 4152 1000

3.0 5061 1000

2.0 7592 1000

1.8 8377 1000

0.3 48592 1000

30.2 500 5

RAW +

JPEG

Total size of RAW

+ JPEG 385 4

●The values of the le size, recordable shots, and maximum burst were

measured using a Canon’s testing standard 16 GB memory card and

based on the testing standards (the aspect ratio of 3:2, ISO100, and

the picture style set to Standard). These values may vary depending

on conditions.

●The values of the maximum burst were measured using a 16 GB

UHS-I memory card.

Power Supplies

Battery

Battery Pack LP-E17 (Quantity 1)

*AC power can be supplied via AC Adapter Kit

ACK-E17

Number of

possible shots

(Based on

CIPA testing

standards)

Room temperature (23°C) Approx. 250 images /

Low temperature (0°C) Approx. 185 images

Movie shooting

time

Room temperature (23°C) Approx. 1 h 40 min. /

Low temperature (0°C) Approx. 1 h 35 min.

(When using fully charged Battery Pack LP-E17)

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions

(W x H x D)

Approx. 110.9 x 68.0 x 44.4 mm (4.4 x 2.7 x 1.7 in.)

Weight

Approx. 366 g (12.9 oz.) (Based on CIPA

Guidelines: includes camera body + battery pack

+ card)

Approx. 319 g (11.3 oz.) (camera body only,

excluding the lens cap)

Operation Environment

Working

temperature

range

0°C - 40°C

Working

humidity 85% or less

196

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Internal Flash Range Guide

(approx. - m)

ISO speed When EF-M18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM is Attached

Wide-angle: f/3.5 Telephoto: f/5.6

100 0.5 - 1.4 0.5 - 0.9

200 0.5 - 2.0 0.5 - 1.3

400 0.5 - 2.9 0.5 - 1.8

800 0.7 - 4.0 0.5 - 2.5

1600 1.0 - 5.7 0.6 - 3.6

3200 1.5 - 8.1 0.9 - 5.1

6400 2.1 - 11.4 1.3 - 7.1

12800 2.9 - 16.2 1.8 - 10.1

H (equivalent to

25600) 4.1 - 22.9 2.6 - 14.3

Battery Pack LP-E17

Type Rechargeable lithium-ion battery

Rated voltage 7.2 V DC

Battery

capacity 1040 mAh

Working

temperature

range

Charging: 5°C - 40°C

Shooting: 0°C - 40°C

Working

humidity 85% or less

Dimensions

(W x H x D)

Approx. 33.0 x 14.0 x 49.4 mm (1.30 x 0.55 x 1.94

in.)

Weight Approx. 45 g (1.59 oz.) (excluding protective

cover)

Recording Time per Memory Card

Using a 16 GB memory card

Image

Quality File Size (Approx. MB) Total Recording Time (Approx.)

172.6 MB/minute 1 hour 26 minutes 5 seconds

115.4 MB/minute 2 hours 8 minutes 27 seconds

22.4 MB/minute 10 hours 22 minutes 35

seconds

●Continuous shooting is possible until either the memory card reaches

its limit or the recording time reaches 29 minutes 59 seconds.

●Recording may stop even if the limit of 29 minutes 59 seconds has not

been reached on some memory cards. SD Speed Class 4 or higher

memory cards are recommended. Faster memory cards are required

when shooting stills while recording a movie.

197

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Battery Charger LC-E17/LC-E17E

Compatible

battery Battery Pack LP-E17

Recharging

time Approx. 2 hours (at room temperature)

Rated input 100 - 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)

Rated output 8.4 V DC / 700mA

Working

temperature

range

5°C - 40°C

Working

humidity 85% or less

Dimensions

(W x H x D)

Approx. 67.3 x 27.7 x 92.2 mm (2.65 x 1.09 x 3.63

in.)

Weight

LC-E17: Approx. 85 g (3.00 oz.)

LC-E17E: Approx. 80 g (2.82 oz.) (excluding

power cord)

●All the data above is based on Canon’s testing standards and CIPA

(Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards and

guidelines.

●Dimensions, maximum diameter, length and weight listed above are

based on CIPA Guidelines (except weight for camera body only).

●Product specications and the exterior are subject to change without

notice.

●If a problem occurs with a non-Canon lens attached to the camera,

consult the respective lens manufacturer.

198

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Advanced Guide

Index

Numbers

1-point (AF frame mode) 69

AC adapter kit 148, 151

Accessories 148

AEB shooting 63

AE Lock 61

AF frames 69

AF lock 71

AF-point zoom 74

Art bold effect (shooting mode)

Aspect ratio 45

Auto Lighting Optimizer 64

Auto mode (shooting mode) 23

AUTO mode (shooting mode) 35

Auto rotate 108

Av (shooting mode) 83

Batteries → Date/time (date/time

battery)

Power saving 28

Battery charger 2, 148

Battery pack

Charging 16

Eco Mode 139

Level 174

Power saving 28

Black and white images 57

BULB (Bulb exposure) 85

B/W (Monochrome) 67

Camera

Reset all 145

Camera access point mode 122

Camera shake 23

CANON iMAGE GATEWAY 122

Charging 17

Chromatic aberration 79

Cleaning (image sensor) 142

Close-up (shooting mode) 51

Color temperature 66

Color (white balance) 65

Compression ratio 43

Contrast 68

Creative Assist (shooting mode) 48

Creative lters (shooting mode) 52

Cropping 110, 162

C (shooting mode) 88

Custom Functions 88

Custom WB 65

Custom white balance 65

Date/time

Changing 19

Date/time battery 19

Settings 18

World clock 141

DC coupler 151

Defaults → Clear settings

Direct printing 194

Display language 20

Display period 49

DLNA 115

DPOF 164

Eco Mode 139

Editing

Cropping 110

Red-eye correction 112

Resizing images 109

Editing or erasing connection

informationEditing or erasing

connection information 116

Erasing 105

Erasing all 106

Error messages 172

Exposure

AE lock 61

Compensation 61

FE lock 76

Face+Tracking AF 70

Faithful 67

Favorites 108

FEB 156

FE Lock 76

File numbering 137

Filter effects 68

Firmware 145

First-curtain synchronization 156

Fish-eye effect (shooting mode) 54

Flash

Flash exposure compensation 76

Flash off 75

On 75

Slow synchro 75

Flash exposure compensation 76

Flash Mode 155

Flash off 75

Focusing

AF frames 69

AF lock 71

MF peaking 74

Servo AF 72

Touch AF 71

Focusing Range

Manual focus 74

Focus lock 70

Food (shooting mode) 52

Grainy B/W (shooting mode) 57

Grid lines 30

Handheld nightscene (shooting mode)

HDMI cable 150

High dynamic range (shooting mode)

High ISO speed noise reduction 80

Household power 151

Hybrid Auto (shooting mode) 37

Icons 174, 175

Image dust prevention 142

Image quality → Compression ratio

(image quality)

Images

Display period 47

Erasing 105

Playback → Viewing

Protecting 102

Image stabilization 78

Image Sync 131

Index display 97

Indicator 34, 47

Installation 134, 158

ISO speed 62

199

Basic Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Advanced Guide

Index

Saturation 68

Saving images to a computer 132,

159

Screen

Display language 20

Icons 174, 175

Menu → Quick Setting menu,

SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards

→ Memory cards

Searching 98

Second-curtain synchronization 156

Self-timer 40

2-second self-timer 41

Sending images 122

Sending images to another camera

129

Sending images to a printer 132

Sending images to Web services 125

Sensor cleaning 142

Servo AF 72

Sharpness 68

Shooting

Shooting information 174

Single-image display 25

Slideshow 101

Slow synchro 75

Soft focus (shooting mode) 56

Software

Installation 158

Saving images to a computer

132, 159

Sounds 137

Sports (shooting mode) 51

Strap 16

Terminal 150, 151, 160

Tone priority 64

Toning effect 68

Touch AF 71

Touch screen 3

Touch shutter 41

Toy camera effect (shooting mode)

Traveling with the camera 141

Tripod socket 3

Troubleshooting 168

TV display 150

Tv (shooting mode) 82

Viewing 25

Image search 98

Index display 97

Jump to image 99

Magnied display 100

Single-image display 25

Slideshow 101

TV display 150

Water painting effect (shooting mode)

White balance (color) 65

Wi-Fi functions 115

Wireless ash shooting 155

World clock 141

Wrist strap → Strap

Zoom 23

Jump display 99

Landscape 67

Landscape (shooting mode) 51

Lens 20

Lock release 21

Level 174

Long exposure noise reduction 81

M (shooting mode) 84

Macro photography 51

Magnied display 100

Main Dial 3

Manual focus 74

Memory cards 2

Basic operations 32

Table 177

Metering method 62

MF (manual focusing) 74

MF peaking 74

Miniature effect (shooting mode) 55

Movies

Editing 113

Image quality (resolution/frame

rate) 43

Multi Shot Noise Reduction 80

Neck strap → Strap

Neutral 67

Noise reduction

High ISO speed 80

Long exposure 81

Nomenclature 3

On 75

P (shooting mode) 60

Package contents 2

Peripheral illumination correction 79

Photobook set-up 166

PictBridge 150, 160

Picture Style 67

Playback → Viewing

Portrait (shooting mode) 51

Power 148 → AC adapter kit,

→ Battery charger, → Battery pack

Power saving 28

Printing 160 → Print

Program AE 60

Protecting 102

Q menu → Quick Setting menu

Quick Setting menu

Basic operations 31

Table 179

Rating 108

RAW 43

Red-eye correction 112

Remote shooting 133

Reset all 145

Resizing images 109

Resolution (image size) 43

Rotating 107

200

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions

• The model number is PC2064 (including WLAN module model WM223).

•

• According to foreign exchange and foreign trade law regulations, export

permission (or service transaction permission) from the Japanese

government is necessary to export strategic resources or services

(including this product) outside Japan.

• Because this product includes American encryption software, it falls under

U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported to or

brought into a country under U.S. trade embargo.

• Be sure to make notes of the wireless LAN settings you use.

The wireless LAN settings saved to this product may change or be erased

due to incorrect operation of the product, the effects of radio waves or

static electricity, or accident or malfunction. Be sure to make notes of

wireless LAN settings as a precaution. Please note that Canon accepts no

responsibility for direct or indirect damages or loss of earnings resulting

from a degradation or disappearance of content.

• When transferring this product to another person, disposing of it, or

sending it for repair, be sure to note the wireless LAN settings and reset

the product to its default settings (erase settings) if necessary.

• Canon will not make compensation for damages resulting from loss or

theft of the product.

Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss resulting from

unauthorized access or use of target devices registered on this product

due to loss or theft of the product.

• Be sure to use the product as directed in this guide.

Be sure to use the wireless LAN function of this product within the

guidelines noted in this guide. Canon accepts no responsibility for

damages or loss if the function and product are used in ways other than

as described in this guide.

•

Radio Wave Interference Precautions

• This product may receive interference from other devices that emit radio

waves. To avoid interference, be sure to use this product as far away as

possible from such devices, or avoid using the devices at the same time

as this product.

Security Precautions

Because Wi-Fi uses radio waves to transmit signals, security precautions

more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required.

Keep the following points in mind when using Wi-Fi.

• Only use networks you are authorized to use.

This product searches for Wi-Fi networks in the vicinity and displays the

results on the screen. Networks you are not authorized to use (unknown

networks) may also be displayed. However, attempting to connect to or

using such networks could be regarded as unauthorized access. Be sure

to use only networks you are authorized to use, and do not attempt to

connect to other unknown networks.

If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may

occur.

• Transmission monitoring

Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions and

attempt to acquire the data you are sending.

201

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

1Camera Basics

2Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3Other Shooting Modes

Tv, Av, and M Mode

6Playback Mode

7Wi-Fi Functions

8Set-Up Menu

9Accessories

Appendix

Index

4P Mode

5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Before Use

• The N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc. in

the United States and in other countries.

• All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

• This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.

• This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard

and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding

MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and

non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the

AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted

or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.

Disclaimer

• Unauthorized reproduction of this guide is prohibited.

• All measurements based on Canon testing standards.

• Information subject to change without notice, as are product specications

and appearance.

• Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the actual

equipment.

• The above items notwithstanding, Canon cannot be held liable for any loss

arising from the use of this product.

All lenses and accessories mentioned in this instruction manual are

current as of September 2014. Consult the Customer Service Center

for usage with lenses and accessories released after that date.

• Unauthorized network access

Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to the

network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.

Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access

such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain

access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where

someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard to

cover their tracks when inltrating other systems).

To prevent these types of problems from occurring, be sure to thoroughly

secure your Wi-Fi network.

Only use this camera’s Wi-Fi function with a proper understanding of

Wi-Fi security, and balance risk and convenience when adjusting security

settings.

The camera can print to PictBridge-compatible printers

via Wi-Fi. PictBridge technical standards make it easy

to connect digital cameras, printers, and other devices

directly. Additionally, a new standard called DPS

over IP enables PictBridge connections in network

environments, and the camera is also compatible with

this standard.

Trademarks and Licensing

• DCF is a group trademark and Japanese registered trademark of the

Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association.

• Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

• Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the

U.S. and other countries.

• App Store, iPhone, and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc.

• The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

• HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Denition Multimedia Interface are

trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.

• Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Alliance®, WPA™, WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ are

trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.